VOLVO XC90 Owner's Manual

VOLVO XC90

Owner's Manual Web Edition

Welcome to the world-wide family of Volvo owners. We trustthat you will enjoy many years of safe driving in your Volvo, anautomobile designed with your safety and comfort in mind. Weencourage you to familiarize yourself with the equipmentdescriptions and operating instructions in this manual. We alsourge you and your passengers to wear seat belts at all times inthis (or any other) vehicle. And, of course, please do not operatea vehicle if you may be affected by alcohol, medication or anyimpairment that could hinder your ability to drive.

Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable federal safety andemission standards. For further information please contactyour retailer, or:

In the USA: Volvo Cars of North America, LLC Customer CareCenter

1 Volvo Drive

P.O. Box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

www.volvocars.us

In Canada: Volvo Cars of Canada Corp

National Customer Service

175 Gordon Baker Road

North York, Ontario M2H 2N7

1-800-663-8255

www.volvocanada.com

2009 © Volvo Car Corporation, All rights reserved.

Contents

4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

0000 Introduction

Important information............................... 10Volvo and the environment....................... 12Important warnings................................... 13

0101 Safety

Occupant safety........................................ 16Seat belts.................................................. 18Supplemental Restraint System............... 20Front airbags............................................. 21Occupant Weight Sensor.......................... 25Side impact protection airbags................. 28Volvo Inflatable Curtain............................. 29Whiplash Protection System..................... 31Child safety............................................... 33Child restraint systems............................. 35Infant seats............................................... 37Convertible seats...................................... 39Booster cushions...................................... 42ISOFIX lower anchors............................... 43Top tether anchors.................................... 45Child restraint registration and recalls...... 46Integrated booster cushion....................... 47

0202 Instruments and controls

Instrument overview.................................. 52Instrument panel....................................... 54Information display................................... 58Center console buttons............................ 60Steering wheel adjustment....................... 62Lighting panel........................................... 63Manually unlocking the fuel filler door...... 65Left-side steering wheel lever................... 66Right-side steering wheel lever................. 67Hazard warning flashers........................... 70Trip computer........................................... 71Cruise control............................................ 7312-volt sockets......................................... 75Parking brake............................................ 76Hood/tailgate............................................ 77Power windows......................................... 78Mirrors....................................................... 80Power moonroof....................................... 83HomeLink® Wireless Control System*..... 85

Contents

5

0303 Climate

Climate control system – general informa-tion............................................................ 90Air distribution........................................... 92Electronic climate control (ECC)............... 94

0404 Interior

Front seats.............................................. 100Rear seats............................................... 104Interior lighting........................................ 107Storage compartments........................... 109Securing cargo........................................ 114

0505 Locks and alarm

Remote keys and key blades.................. 120Locking and unlocking............................ 124Child safety locks.................................... 126Alarm....................................................... 127

Contents


0606 Starting and driving

General information................................ 130Fuel requirements................................... 131Refueling................................................. 133Starting the vehicle................................. 135Ignition switch and steering wheel lock. . 137Economical driving.................................. 138Difficult driving conditions...................... 139Automatic transmission.......................... 140Jump starting.......................................... 143All Wheel Drive*....................................... 144Brake system.......................................... 145Stability system....................................... 147Front/rear park assist*............................. 149Towing.................................................... 151Towing a trailer....................................... 153Detachable trailer hitch........................... 156Load carriers (accessory)........................ 157Cold weather precautions....................... 158Before a long distance trip...................... 159Blind Spot Information System............... 160

0707 Wheels and tires

General information................................ 166Tire inflation ............................................ 169Tire inflation pressure tables – U.S. mod-els............................................................ 171Tire inflation pressure tables – Canadianmodels.................................................... 172Tire designations..................................... 173Glossary of tire terminology.................... 175Vehicle loading........................................ 176Uniform Tire Quality Grading.................. 177Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires. . 178Temporary spare..................................... 179Changing wheels.................................... 180Tire Sealing System ............................... 184Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) –U.S. models only..................................... 189 08

08 Car care

Washing and cleaning the vehicle.......... 194Paint touch up......................................... 198

Contents

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 7

0909 Maintenance and servicing

Volvo service........................................... 202Maintaining your vehicle......................... 203Working on your vehicle......................... 205Engine compartment............................... 207Engine oil................................................ 208Fluids...................................................... 211Wiper blades........................................... 213Battery..................................................... 214Replacing bulbs...................................... 217Fuses...................................................... 224 10

10 Audio

Audio system overview........................... 238Audio system controls............................ 239Radio functions....................................... 244Sirius satellite radio................................. 249Auxiliary equipment................................ 253CD player/changer.................................. 255Menu structure........................................ 258Rear Seat Entertainment – Dual Screen(RSE)*...................................................... 259 11

11 Specifications

Label information.................................... 264Dimensions ............................................ 266Weights .................................................. 268Fluids...................................................... 270Suspension............................................. 272Engine oil................................................ 273Engine specifications.............................. 274Electrical system..................................... 275Three-way catalytic converter................. 277Volvo programs....................................... 278

Contents

8

1212 Index

Index....................................................... 280

Contents

9

Introduction

Important information

10

About this manual

• Before you operate your vehicle for the firsttime, please familiarize yourself with theinformation in chapters 1 and 3.

• Information contained in the balance of themanual is extremely useful and should beread after operating the vehicle for the firsttime.

• The manual is structured so that it can beused for reference. For this reason, itshould be kept in the vehicle for readyaccess.

Options and accessories

Optional or accessory equipment described inthis manual is indicated by an asterisk.

Optional or accessory equipment may not beavailable in all countries or markets. Pleasenote that some vehicles may be equipped dif-ferently, depending on special legal require-ments.

NOTE

• All information, illustrations and specifi-cations contained in this manual arebased on the latest product informationavailable at the time of publication.

• Volvo reserves the right to make modelchanges at any time, or to change spec-ifications or design without notice andwithout incurring obligation.

• Do not export your Volvo to anothercountry before investigating that coun-try's applicable safety and emissioncontrol requirements. In some cases itmay be difficult or impossible to complywith these requirements. Modificationsto the emission control system(s) mayrender your Volvo not certifiable forlegal operation in the U.S., Canada andother countries.

WARNING

If your vehicle is involved in an accident,unseen damage may affect its driveabilityand safety.

WARNING

Certain components of this vehicle such asair bag modules, seat belt pretensioners,adaptive steering columns, and button cellbatteries may contain Perchlorate material.Special handling may apply for service orvehicle end of life disposal.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Shiftlock

When your vehicle is parked, the gear selectoris locked in the (P)ark position. To release theselector from this position, turn the ignition keyto position II (or start the engine), depress thebrake pedal, press the button on the front sideof the gear selector and move the selector from(P)ark.

Keylock (automatic transmission)

When you switch off the ignition, the gearselector must be in the (P)ark position beforethe key can be removed from the ignitionswitch.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

The ABS system in your vehicle performs aself-diagnostic test when the vehicle first rea-ches the speed of approximately 12 mph(20 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several

Introduction

Important information

11

times and a sound may be audible from theABS control module. This is normal.

Fuel filler door

Press the button on the light switch panel (seethe illustration on page 64) when the vehicleis at a standstill to unlock the fuel filler door.Please note that the fuel filler door will remainunlocked until the vehicle begins to move for-ward. An audible click will be heard when thefuel filler door relocks.

Fuel filler cap

The fuel filler door, located on the right rearfender, is connected to your vehicle's centrallocking system.

Points to keep in mind

• The manual is structured so that it can beused for reference. For this reason, itshould be kept in the vehicle for readyaccess.

• Do not export your Volvo to another coun-try before investigating that country'sapplicable safety and exhaust emissionrequirements. In some cases it may be dif-ficult or impossible to comply with theserequirements. Modifications to the emis-sion control system(s) may render yourVolvo not certifiable for legal operation inthe U.S., Canada and other countries.

• All information, illustrations and specifica-tions contained in this manual are based on

the latest product information available atthe time of publication. Please note thatsome vehicles may be equipped differ-ently, depending on special legal require-ments. Optional equipment described inthis manual may not be available in all mar-kets.

• Volvo reserves the right to make modelchanges at any time, or to change specifi-cations or design without notice and with-out incurring obligation.

Vehicle event data (Black box)

Your vehicle's driving and safety systemsemploy computers that monitor, and sharewith each other, information about your vehi-cle's operation. One or more of these comput-ers may store what they monitor, either duringnormal vehicle operation or in a crash or near-crash event. Stored information may be readand used by:

• Volvo Car Corporation

• service and repair facilities

• law enforcement or government agencies

• others who may assert a legal right toknow, or who obtain your consent to knowsuch information.

Introduction

Volvo and the environment

12

WARNING

CALIFORNIA proposition 65

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,and certain vehicle components contain oremit chemicals known to the state of Cali-fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects orother reproductive harm. In addition, certainfluids contained in vehicles and certainproducts of component wear contain oremit chemicals known to the State of Cali-fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects orother reproductive harm.

Volvo is committed to the well being of its cus-tomers. As a natural part of this commitment,we care about the environment in which we alllive. Caring for the environment means aneveryday involvement in reducing our environ-mental impact. Volvo's environmental activitiesare based on a holistic view, which means weconsider the overall environmental impact of aproduct throughout its complete life cycle. Inthis context, design, production, product use,and recycling are all important considerations.In production, Volvo has partly or completelyphased out several chemicals including CFCs,lead chromates, asbestos, and cadmium; andreduced the number of chemicals used in ourplants 50% since 1991.

Volvo was the first in the world to introduce intoproduction a three-way catalytic converter with

a Lambda sond, now called the heated oxygensensor, in 1976. The current version of thishighly efficient system reduces emissions ofharmful substances (CO, HC, NOx) from theexhaust pipe by approximately 95-99% andthe search to eliminate the remaining emis-sions continues. Volvo is the only automobilemanufacturer to offer CFC-free retrofit kits forthe air conditioning system of all models as farback as the 1975 model 240. Advanced elec-tronic engine controls and cleaner fuels arebringing us closer to our goal. After Volvo vehi-cles and parts have fulfilled their use, recyclingis the next critical step in completing the lifecycle. The metal content is about 75% of thetotal weight of a vehicle, which makes the vehi-cle among the most recycled industrial prod-ucts. In order to have efficient and well-con-trolled recycling, dismantling information isavailable for all Volvo models. For Volvo, allhomogeneous plastic parts weighing morethan 3.4 oz. (100 grams) are marked with inter-national symbols that indicate how the com-ponent is to be sorted for recycling. In additionto continuous environmental refinement ofconventional gasoline-powered internal com-bustion engines, Volvo is actively looking atadvanced technology alternative-fuel vehicles.

When you drive a Volvo, you become our part-ner in the work to lessen the car's impact on

the environment. To reduce your vehicle'senvironmental impact, you can:

• Maintain proper air pressure in your tires.Tests have shown decreased fuel econ-omy with improperly inflated tires.

• Follow the recommended maintenanceschedule in your Warranty and ServiceRecords Information booklet.

• Drive at a constant speed whenever pos-sible.

• See a trained and qualified Volvo servicetechnician as soon as possible for inspec-tion if the check engine (malfunction indi-cator) light illuminates, or stays on after thevehicle has started.

• Properly dispose of any vehicle-relatedwaste such as used motor oil, used batter-ies, brake pads, etc.

• When cleaning your vehicle, please usegenuine Volvo car care products. All Volvocar care products are formulated to beenvironmentally friendly.

For additional information regarding the envi-ronmental activities in which Volvo Cars ofNorth America, LLC and Volvo Car Corporationare involved, visit our Internet home page at:http://www.volvocars.us.

Introduction

Important warnings

13

Accessory Installation

• We strongly recommend that Volvo ownersinstall only genuine, Volvo-approvedaccessories, and that accessory installa-tions be performed only by a trained andqualified Volvo service technician.

• Genuine Volvo accessories are tested toensure compatibility with the performance,safety, and emission systems in your vehi-cle. Additionally, a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician knows whereaccessories may and may not be safelyinstalled in your Volvo. In all cases, pleaseconsult a trained and qualified Volvo serv-ice technician before installing any acces-sory in or on your vehicle.

• Accessories that have not been approvedby Volvo may or may not be specificallytested for compatibility with your vehicle.Additionally, an inexperienced installermay not be familiar with some of your vehi-cle's systems.

• Any of your vehicle's performance andsafety systems could be adversely affec-ted if you install accessories that Volvo hasnot tested, or if you allow accessories to beinstalled by someone unfamiliar with yourvehicle.

• Damage caused by unapproved orimproperly installed accessories may notbe covered by your new vehicle warranty.See your Warranty and Service Records

Information booklet for more warrantyinformation. Volvo assumes no responsi-bility for death, injury, or expenses thatmay result from the installation of nonge-nuine accessories.

Driver distraction

• Driver distraction results from driver activ-ities that are not directly related to control-ling the vehicle in the driving environment.Your new Volvo is, or can be, equippedwith many feature-rich entertainment andcommunication systems. These includehands-free cellular telephones, navigationsystems, and multipurpose audio systems.You may also own other portable elec-tronic devices for your own convenience.When used properly and safely, they enrichthe driving experience. Improperly used,any of these could cause a distraction.

• For all of these systems, we want to pro-vide the following warning that reflects thestrong Volvo concern for your safety:

• Never use these devices or any feature ofyour vehicle in a way that distracts youfrom the task of driving safely. Distractioncan lead to a serious accident. In additionto this general warning, we offer the fol-lowing guidance regarding specific newerfeatures that may be found in your vehicle:

• Never use a hand-held cellular telephonewhile driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit

cellular telephone use by a driver while thevehicle is moving.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a naviga-tion system, set and make changes to yourtravel itinerary only with the vehicle parked.

• Never program your audio system whilethe vehicle is moving. Program radio pre-sets with the vehicle parked, and use yourprogrammed presets to make radio usequicker and simpler.

• Never use portable computers or personaldigital assistants while the vehicle is mov-ing.

A driver has a responsibility to do everythingpossible to ensure his or her own safety andthe safety of passengers in the vehicle and oth-ers sharing the roadway. Avoiding distractionsis part of that responsibility.

G020871

14

Occupant safety...................................................................................... 16Seat belts................................................................................................ 18Supplemental Restraint System.............................................................. 20Front airbags........................................................................................... 21Occupant Weight Sensor........................................................................ 25Side impact protection airbags............................................................... 28Volvo Inflatable Curtain........................................................................... 29Whiplash Protection System................................................................... 31Child safety............................................................................................. 33Child restraint systems........................................................................... 35Infant seats.............................................................................................. 37Convertible seats.................................................................................... 39Booster cushions.................................................................................... 42ISOFIX lower anchors............................................................................. 43Top tether anchors.................................................................................. 45Child restraint registration and recalls.................................................... 46Integrated booster cushion..................................................................... 47

01SAFETY

01 Safety

Occupant safety 01

16

Volvo's concern for safety

Safety is the Volvo cornerstone. Our concerndates back to 1927 when the first Volvo rolledoff the production line. Three-point seat belts(a Volvo invention), safety cages, and energy-absorbing impact zones were designed intoVolvo vehicles long before it was fashionableor required by government regulation. We willnot compromise our commitment to safety. Wecontinue to seek out new safety features andto refine those already in our vehicles. You canhelp. We would appreciate hearing your sug-gestions about improving automobile safety.We also want to know if you ever have a safetyconcern with your vehicle. Call us in the U.S.at: 800-458-1552 or in Canada at:800-663-8255.

Occupant safety reminders

How safely you drive doesn't depend on howold you are but rather on:

• How well you see.

• Your ability to concentrate.

• How quickly you make decisions understress to avoid an accident.

The tips listed below are suggestions to helpyou cope with the ever changing traffic envi-ronment.

• Never drink and drive.

• If you are taking any medication, consultyour physician about its potential effectson your driving abilities.

• Take a driver-retraining course.

• Have your eyes checked regularly.

• Keep your windshield and headlightsclean.

• Replace wiper blades when they start toleave streaks.

• Take into account the traffic, road, andweather conditions, particularly withregard to stopping distance.

Reporting safety defects in the U.S.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying Volvo Cars of North Amer-ica, LLC. If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open an investiga-tion, and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your retailer, or VolvoCars of North America, LLC. To con-tact NHTSA, you may either call theAuto Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans-portation, Washington D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other informationabout motor vehicle safety from:http://www.safercar.gov

Volvo strongly recommends that ifyour vehicle is covered under a serv-ice campaign, safety or emissionrecall or similar action, it should becompleted as soon as possible.Please check with your local retaileror Volvo Cars of North America, LLCif your vehicle is covered under theseconditions.

NHTSA can be reached at:

Internet:

01 Safety

Occupant safety 01

17

http://www.nhtsa.gov

Telephone:

1-888-DASH-2-DOT(1-888-327-4236).

Reporting safety defects in Canada

If you believe your vehicle has a defect thatcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform Trans-port Canada in addition to notifying Volvo Carsof Canada Corp.

To contact Transport Canada, call(800) 333-0510, or (613) 993-9851 if you arecalling from the Ottawa region.

01 Safety

Seat belts 01

18

Using seat belts

G020104

Adjusting the seat belt

Volvo, the inventor of the three-point seat belt,urges you and all occupants of your vehicle towear seat belts and ensure that children areproperly restrained, using an infant, car, orbooster seat determined by age, weight andheight.

Volvo also believes no child should sit in thefront seat of a vehicle.

Most states and provinces make it mandatoryfor occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts.

Seat belt pretensioners

The seat belts are equipped with pretensionersthat reduce slack in the belts. These preten-

sioners are triggered in situations where theairbags deploy. The front seat belts alsoinclude a tension reducing device which, in theevent of a collision, limits the peak forces exer-ted by the seat belt on the occupant.

Buckling a seat belt

Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latchplate into the receptacle until a distinct click isheard. The seat belt retractor is normally"unlocked" and you can move freely, providedthat the shoulder belt is not pulled out too far.

The retractor will lock up as follows:

• if the belt is pulled out rapidly

• during braking and acceleration

• if the vehicle is leaning excessively

• when driving in turns

When wearing the seat belt remember:

• The belt should not be twisted or turned.

• The lap section of the belt must be posi-tioned low on the hips (not pressing againstthe abdomen).

• Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolledup into its retractor and that the shoulderand lap belts are taut.

Unbuckling the seat belt

To remove the seat belt, press the red sectionon the seat belt receptacle. Before exiting thevehicle, check that the seat belt retracts fully

after being unbuckled. If necessary, guide thebelt back into the retractor slot.

Seat belt reminder

The seat belt reminder consists of an audiblesignal, an indicator light above the rearviewmirror, and a symbol in the instrument panelthat alert the driver and front seat passenger iftheir seat belts are not fastened.

01 Safety

Seat belts 01

19

WARNING

• Never use a seat belt for more than oneoccupant.

• Never wear the shoulder portion of thebelt under the arm, behind the back orotherwise out of position. Such usecould cause injury in the event of anaccident.

• Seat belts lose much of their strengthwhen exposed to violent stretching andshould be replaced after any collision,even if they appear to be undamaged.

• Never repair the belt yourself; have thiswork done by an authorized Volvo serv-ice technician only.

• Any device used to induce slack into theshoulder belt portion of the three-pointbelt system will have a detrimentaleffect on the amount of protection avail-able to you in the event of a collision.

• The seat back should not be tilted toofar back. The shoulder belt must be tautin order to function properly.

• Do not use child safety seats or childbooster cushions/backrests in the frontpassenger's seat. We also recommendthat children who have outgrown thesedevices sit in the rear seat with the seatbelt properly fastened.

Seat belt use during pregnancy

G020105

The seat belt should always be worn duringpregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in thecorrect way. The diagonal section should wrapover the shoulder then be routed between thebreasts and to the side of the belly. The lapsection should lay flat over the thighs and aslow as possible under the belly. It must neverbe allowed to ride upward. Remove all slackfrom the belt and insure that it fits close to thebody without any twists.

As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant driversshould adjust their seats and steering wheelsuch that they can easily maintain control of thevehicle as they drive (which means they mustbe able to easily operate the foot pedals and

steering wheel). Within this context, theyshould strive to position the seat with as largea distance as possible between their belly andthe steering wheel.

Child seats

Please see page 34 for information on secur-ing child seats with the seat belts.

Seat belt maintenance

Check periodically that the seat belts are ingood condition. Use water and a mild deter-gent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanismfunction as follows: attach the seat belt and pullrapidly on the strap.

01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System 01

20

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

G027284

SRS warning light

As an enhancement to the three-point seatbelts, your Volvo is equipped with a Supple-mental Restraint System (SRS). Volvo's SRSconsists of seat belt pretensioners, front air-bags, side impact airbags, the occupantweight sensor, and inflatable curtains. All ofthese systems are monitored by the SRS con-trol module. An SRS warning light in the instru-ment panel (see the illustration) illuminateswhen the ignition key is turned to position I, II,or III, and will normally go out after approxi-mately 7 seconds if no faults are detected inthe system.

Where applicable, a text messagewill also be displayed when theSRS warning light illuminates. Ifthis warning symbol is not func-tioning properly, the general warn-

ing symbol illuminates and a text message willbe displayed.

WARNING

• If the SRS warning light stays on afterthe engine has started or if it illuminateswhile you are driving, have the vehicleinspected by a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician as soon aspossible.

• Never try to repair any component orpart of the SRS yourself. Any interfer-ence in the system could cause mal-function and serious injury. All work onthese systems should be performed byan authorized Volvo service technician.

WARNING

If your vehicle has been subjected to floodconditions (e.g. soaked carpeting/standingwater on the floor of the vehicle) or if yourvehicle has become flood-damaged in anyway, do not attempt to start the vehicle orput the key in the ignition before discon-necting the battery (see below). This maycause airbag deployment which could resultin personal injury. Have the vehicle towed toa trained and qualified Volvo service tech-nician for repairs.

Automatic transmission:

Before attempting to tow the vehicle, usethe following procedure to override theshiftlock system to move the gear selectorto the neutral position:

1. Switch off the ignition for at least10 minutes and disconnect the battery.

2. Wait at least one minute.

3. Insert the key in the ignition and turn itto position II

4. Press firmly on the brake pedal.

5. Move the gear selector from P (Park) tothe N(Neutral) position.

01 Safety

Front airbags 01

��

21

The front airbag system

G020111

The front airbags supplement the three-pointseat belts. For these airbags to provide theprotection intended, seat belts must be wornat all times.

The front airbag system includes gas genera-tors surrounded by the airbags, and decelera-tion sensors that activate the gas generators,causing the airbags to be inflated with nitrogengas.

G031006

Location of the passenger's side front airbag

As the movement of the seats' occupants com-presses the airbags, some of the gas is expel-led at a controlled rate to provide better cush-ioning. Both seat belt pretensioners alsodeploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entireprocess, including inflation and deflation of theairbags, takes approximately one fifth of a sec-ond.

The location of the front airbags is indicated bySRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering wheelpad and above the glove compartment, and bydecals on both sun visors and on the front andfar right side of the dash.

• The driver's side front airbag is folded andlocated in the steering wheel hub.

• The passenger's side front airbag is foldedbehind a panel located above the glovecompartment.

01 Safety

Front airbags 01

22

WARNING

• The airbags in the vehicle are designedto be a SUPPLEMENT to–not a replace-ment for–the three-point seat belts. Formaximum protection, wear seat belts atall times. Be aware that no system canprevent all possible injuries that mayoccur in an accident.

• Never drive a vehicle with a steeringwheel-mounted airbag with your handson the steering wheel pad/airbag hous-ing.

• The front airbags are designed to helpprevent serious injury. Deploymentoccurs very quickly and with consider-able force. During normal deploymentand depending on variables such asseating position, one may experienceabrasions, bruises, swellings, or otherinjuries as a result from deployment ofone or both of the airbags.

• When installing any accessory equip-ment, make sure that the front airbagsystem is not damaged. Any interfer-ence in the system could cause mal-function.

Front airbag deployment

• The front airbags are designed to deployduring certain frontal or front-angular col-lisions, impacts, or decelerations, depend-ing on the crash severity, angle, speed andobject impacted. The airbags may alsodeploy in certain non-frontal collisionswhere rapid deceleration occurs.

• The SRS sensors, which trigger the frontairbags, are designed to react to both theimpact of the collision and the inertialforces generated by it, and to determine ifthe intensity of the collision is sufficient forthe seat belt pretensioners and/or airbagsto be deployed.

However, not all frontal collisions activate thefront airbags.

• If the collision involves a nonrigid object(e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixedobject at a low speed, the front airbags willnot necessarily deploy.

• Front airbags do not normally deploy in aside impact collision, in a collision from therear or in a rollover situation.

• The amount of damage to the bodyworkdoes not reliably indicate if the airbagsshould have deployed or not.

NOTE

• Deployment of front airbags occurs onlyone time during an accident. In a colli-sion where deployment occurs, the air-bags and seat belt pretensioners acti-vate. Some noise occurs and a smallamount of powder is released. Therelease of the powder may appear assmoke-like matter. This is a normalcharacteristic and does not indicate fire.

• Volvo's front airbags use special sen-sors that are integrated with the frontseat buckles. The point at which the air-bag deploys is determined by whetheror not the seat belt is being used, as wellas the severity of the collision.

• Collisions can occur where only one ofthe airbags deploys. If the impact is lesssevere, but severe enough to present aclear injury risk, the airbags are trig-gered at partial capacity. If the impact ismore severe, the airbags are triggeredat full capacity.

Should you have questions about any compo-nent in the SRS system, please contact atrained and qualified Volvo service technicianor Volvo Customer Support:

In the USA

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

01 Safety

Front airbags 01

��

23

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive

P.O. Box 914 Rockleigh,

New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

www.volvocars.us

In Canada

Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.




1-800-663-8255

www.volvocanada.com

WARNING

• Do not use child safety seats or childbooster cushions/backrests in the frontpassenger's seat. We also recommendthat occupants under 4 feet 7 inches(140 cm) in height who have outgrownthese devices sit in the rear seat with theseat belt fastened.

• Never drive with the airbags deployed.The fact that they hang out can impairthe steering of your vehicle. Othersafety systems can also be damaged.

• The smoke and dust formed when theairbags are deployed can cause skinand eye irritation in the event of pro-longed exposure.

G032243

Airbag decal in the front passenger's door opening

G032934

Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors

01 Safety

Front airbags 01

24

G032525

Airbag decal on passenger's side dashboard

WARNING

• Children must never be allowed in thefront passenger's seat. Volvo recom-mends that ALL occupants (adults andchildren) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches(140 cm) be seated in the back seat ofany vehicle with a passenger-side frontairbag.

• Occupants in the front passenger's seatmust never sit on the edge of the seat,sit leaning toward the instrument panelor otherwise sit out of position.

• The occupant's back must be as uprightas comfort allows and be against theseat back with the seat belt properlyfastened.

• Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not onthe dash, seat or out of the window.

WARNING

• No objects or accessory equipment,e.g. dashboard covers, may be placedon, attached to, or installed near the airbag hatch (the area above the glovecompartment) or the area affected byairbag deployment.

• There should be no loose articles, e.g.coffee cups, on the floor, seat, or dash-board area.

• Never try to open the airbag cover onthe steering wheel or the passenger'sside dashboard. This should only bedone by a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician.

Failure to follow these instructions canresult in injury to the vehicle occupants.

01 Safety

Occupant Weight Sensor 01

��

25

Disabling the passenger's side frontairbag

G027050

Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light

Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adultsand children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches(140 cm) be seated in the rear seat of any vehi-cle with a passenger's side front airbag, and beproperly restrained. Children should always beseated in child restraints appropriate for theirsize and weight. For child safety recommen-dations, see page 33.

The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) isdesigned to meet the regulatory requirementsof Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard(FMVSS) 208 and is designed to disable (will

not inflate) the passenger's side front airbagunder certain conditions.

The OWS works with sensors that are part ofthe front passenger's seat and seat belt. Thesensors are designed to detect the presence ofa properly seated occupant and determine ifthe passenger's side front airbag should beenabled (may inflate) or disabled (will notinflate).

The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the pas-senger's side front airbag when:

• the front passenger's seat is unoccupied,or has small/medium objects in the frontseat,

• the system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat that isinstalled according to the manufacturer'sinstructions,

• the system determines that a small child ispresent in a forward-facing child restraintthat is installed according to the manufac-turer's instructions,

• the system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat,

• a front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time,

• a child or a small person occupies the frontpassenger's seat.

The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF

indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay onto remind you that the passenger's side frontairbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG

OFF indicator lamp is located in the overheadconsole, near the base of the rearview mirror.

NOTE

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp will illuminate for a short period of timewhen the ignition is turned on to confirm itis functional. When the front passenger'sseat is not occupied (empty seat) or in theevent that the passenger's side front airbagis enabled (may inflate), the PASSENGERAIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will be off.

However, if a fault is detected in the system:

• The OWS indicator light will stay on

• The SRS warning light (see page 20) willcome on and stay on

• The message PASS. AIRBAG OFF

SERVICE URGENT will be displayed in theinformation display.

01 Safety


26

WARNING

• If a fault in the system is detected andindicated as explained, be aware thatthe passenger's side front airbag willnot deploy in the event of a collision.

• In this case, the safety systems andOccupant Weight Sensor should beinspected by a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician as soon aspossible.

WARNING

• Never try to open, remove, or repair anycomponents in the OWS system. Thiscould result in system malfunction.Maintenance or repairs should only becarried out by a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician.

• The front passenger's seat should notbe modified in any way. This couldreduce pressure on the seat cushion,which might interfere with the OWS sys-tem's function.

The OWS is designed to disable (will not inflate)the passenger's side front airbag when a rearfacing infant seat, a forward-facing childrestraint, or a booster seat is detected. ThePASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will

illuminate and stay on to remind you that thepassenger's side front airbag is disabled (seethe following table).

Passeng-er's seatoccu-pancy sta-tus

OWS indi-cator lightstatus

Passeng-er's sidefront air-bag status

Seat unoc-cupied

OWS indica-tor light

is notlit

Passenger'sside frontairbag disa-

bled

Seat occu-pied by lowweightoccupant/objectA


lightsup

Passenger'sside frontairbag disa-

bled

Seat occu-pied byheavy occu-pant/object


is notlit

Passenger'sside frontairbag ena-

bled

A Volvo recommends that children always be properlyrestrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats.Inrare situations when the seat belt is not properly fastened,some child restraints may not be detected by the OWSbecause there is very little weight on the vehicle seat cush-ion. In these cases the passenger's side front airbag may bedisabled, but the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lampwill not be lit. Do not assume that the passenger's side frontairbag is disabled unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF

indicator lamp is lit. Make sure the child restraint is properlyinstalled (turn the vehicle off, remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the childrestraint manufacturer's instructions) and that thePASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is on, or movethe child restraint to the rear seat.

The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate)the passenger's side front airbag anytime thesystem senses that a person of adult size issitting properly in the front passenger's seat.The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp will be off and remain off.

If a person of adult size is sitting in the frontpassenger's seat, but the PASSENGER

AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possiblethat the person isn't sitting properly in the seat.If this happens:

1. Turn the vehicle off and ask the person toplace the seat back in an upright position.

2. Have the person sit upright in the seat,centered on the seat cushion, with the per-son's legs comfortably extended.

3. Restart the vehicle and have the personremain in this position for about twominutes. This will allow the system todetect that person and enable the pas-senger's frontal airbag.

4. If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp remains on even after this, the personshould be advised to ride in the rear seat.

01 Safety


27

This condition reflects limitations of the OWSclassification capability. It does not indicateOWS malfunction.

Modifications

If you are considering modifying your vehicle inany way to accommodate a disability, forexample by altering or adapting the driver's orfront passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag sys-tems, please contact Volvo at:

In the USA

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive

P.O. Box 914 Rockleigh,

New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

In Canada

Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.




1-800-663-8255

WARNING

• No objects that add to the total weighton the seat should be placed on thefront passenger's seat. If a child isseated in the front passenger's seatwith any additional weight, this extraweight could cause the OWS system toenable the airbag, which might cause itto deploy in the event of a collision,thereby injuring the child.

• The seat belt should never be wrappedaround an object on the front passeng-er's seat. This could interfere with theOWS system's function.

• The front passenger's seat belt shouldnever be used in a way that exerts morepressure on the passenger than normal.This could increase the pressure exer-ted on the weight sensor by a child, andcould result in the airbag being enabled,which might cause it to deploy in theevent of a collision, thereby injuring thechild.

WARNING

Keep the following points in mind withrespect to the OWS system. Failure to followthese instructions could adversely affect thesystem's function and result in serious injuryto the occupant of the front passenger'sseat:

• The full weight of the front seat passen-ger should always be on the seat cush-ion. The passenger should never lifthim/herself off the seat cushion usingthe armrest in the door or the centerconsole, by pressing the feet on thefloor, by sitting on the edge of the seatcushion, or by pressing against thebackrest in a way that reduces pressureon the seat cushion. This could causeOWS to disable the front passenger'sside airbag.

• Do not place any type of object on thefront passenger's seat in such a waythat jamming, pressing, or squeezingoccurs between the object and the frontseat, other than as a direct result of thecorrect use of the Automatic LockingRetractor/Emergency Locking Retrac-tor (ALR/ELR) seat belt (see page 34).

• No objects should be placed under thefront passenger's seat. This could inter-fere with the OWS system's function.

01 Safety

Side impact protection airbags 01

28

Side impact airbags – front seats only

G020118

Location of the side impact (SIPS) airbag

As an enhancement to the structural sideimpact protection built into your vehicle, thevehicle is also equipped with Side Impact Pro-tection System (SIPS) airbags.

The SIPS airbag system is designed to helpincrease occupant protection in the event ofcertain side impact collisions. The SIPS air-bags are designed to deploy only during cer-tain side-impact collisions, depending on thecrash severity, angle, speed and point ofimpact.

G025315

Location of the SIPS airbag

NOTE

SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occursonly on the side of the vehicle affected bythe impact. The airbags are not designed todeploy in all side impact situations.

Components in the SIPS airbag system

This SIPS airbag system consists of gas gen-erators and side airbag modules built into theoutboard sides of both front seat backrests.

WARNING

• The SIPS airbag system is a supple-ment to the structural Side Impact Pro-tection System and the three-point seatbelt system. It is not designed to deployduring collisions from the front or rear ofthe vehicle or in rollover situations.

• The use of seat covers on the front seatsmay impede SIPS airbag deployment.

• No objects, accessory equipment orstickers may be placed on, attached toor installed near the SIPS airbag systemor in the area affected by SIPS airbagdeployment.

• Never try to open or repair any compo-nents of the SIPS airbag system. Thisshould be done only by a trained andqualified Volvo service technician.

• In order for the SIPS airbag to provideits best protection, both front seatoccupants should sit in an upright posi-tion with the seat belt properly fastened.

• Failure to follow these instructions canresult in injury to the occupants of thevehicle in the event of an accident.

01 Safety

Volvo Inflatable Curtain 01

��

29

The Volvo Inflatable Curtain (VIC)

G027047

This system consists of inflatable curtainslocated along the sides of the roof liners,stretching from the front side windows to therear edge of the rear side windows. It isdesigned to help protect the heads of the occu-pants of the front seats and the occupants ofthe outboard rear seating positions, includingthe outboard passenger in the optional thirdrow of seats in certain side impact collisions.

G027048

The inflatable curtains in the Volvo XC90 arealso designed to help protect the occupants ofthe vehicle in a roll-over situation, and to helpprevent them from being thrown from the vehi-cle if a roll-over occurs.

NOTE

In 5 -seat models, the Inflatable Curtainsextend to protect both rows of seats. In 7 -seat models, they extend to protect all threerows.

By design, the VIC system deploys only on theside of the vehicle affected by the impact.

However, in certain side impacts, or in a roll-over situation, BOTH the Inflatable Curtainsand the Side Impact Airbag System (SIPS-bag)will deploy, whereas, in some cases, ONLY theInflatable Curtain will deploy. In cases whereBOTH the Inflatable Curtain and the SIPS-bagdeploy, deployment will occur simultaneously.

NOTE

If the Inflatable Curtain deploys, it remainsinflated for approximately 5 seconds.

WARNING

• The VIC system is a supplement to theSide Impact Protection System. It is notdesigned to deploy during collisionsfrom the front or rear of the vehicle or inall rollover situations.

• Never try to open or repair any compo-nents of the VIC system. This should bedone only by a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician.

• Never hang heavy items from the ceilinghandles. This could impede deploymentof the Inflatable curtain.

01 Safety

Volvo Inflatable Curtain 01

30

WARNING

In order for the VIC to provide its best pro-tection, both front seat occupants and bothoutboard rear seat occupants should sit inan upright position with the seat belt prop-erly fastened; adults using the seat belt andchildren using the proper child restraint sys-tem. Only adults should sit in the front seats.Children must never be allowed in the frontpassenger seat. See page 34 for guide-lines. Failure to follow these instructions canresult in injury to the vehicle occupants in anaccident.

01 Safety

Whiplash Protection System 01

��

31

Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) – front seats only

G020347

The Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) con-sists of specially designed hinges and bracketson the front seat backrests designed to helpabsorb some of the energy generated in a col-lision from the rear (when the vehicle is "rear-ended").

In the event of a collision of this type, the hingesand brackets of the front seat backrests aredesigned to change position slightly to allowthe backrest/head restraint to help support theoccupant's head before moving slightly rear-ward. This movement helps absorb some ofthe forces that could result in whiplash.

WARNING

• The WHIPS system is designed to sup-plement the other safety systems inyour vehicle. For this system to functionproperly, the three-point seat belt mustbe worn. Please be aware that no sys-tem can prevent all possible injuries thatmay occur in an accident.

• The WHIPS system is designed to func-tion in certain collisions from the rear,depending on the crash severity, angleand speed.

WARNING

Occupants in the front seats must never sitout of position. The occupant's back mustbe as upright as comfort allows and beagainst the seat back with the seat beltproperly fastened.

01 Safety

Whiplash Protection System 01

32

WARNING

• If your vehicle has been involved in arear-end collision, the front seat backr-ests must be inspected by a trained andqualified Volvo service technician, evenif the seats appear to be undamaged.Certain components in the WHIPS sys-tem may need to be replaced.

• Do not attempt to service any compo-nent in the WHIPS system yourself.

G020125

WARNING

Any contact between the front seat backr-ests and the folded rear seat could impedethe function of the WHIPS system. If the rearseat is folded down, the occupied frontseats must be adjusted forward so that theydo not touch the folded rear seat.

G020126

WARNING

• Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behindthe front seats could impede the func-tion of the WHIPS system.

• If the rear seat backrests are foldeddown, cargo must be secured to pre-vent it from sliding forward against thefront seat backrests in the event of acollision from the rear. This could inter-fere with the action of the WHIPS sys-tem.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

��

33

Children should be seated safely

Volvo recommends the proper use of restraintsystems for all occupants including children.Remember that, regardless of age and size, achild should always be properly restrained in avehicle.

Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/LATCH attachments, which make it more con-venient to install child seats.

Some restraint systems for children aredesigned to be secured in the vehicle by lapbelts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.Such child restraint systems can help protectchildren in vehicles in the event of an accidentonly if they are used properly. However, chil-dren could be endangered in a crash if the childrestraints are not properly secured in the vehi-cle. Failure to follow the installation instructionsfor your child restraint can result in your childstriking the vehicle's interior in a sudden stop.

Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitablesubstitute for a child restraint system. In anaccident, a child held in a person's arms canbe crushed between the vehicle's interior andan unrestrained person. The child could also beinjured by striking the interior, or by being ejec-ted from the vehicle during a sudden maneuveror impact. The same can also happen if theinfant or child rides unrestrained on the seat.Other occupants should also be properly

restrained to help reduce the chance of injuringor increasing the injury of a child.

All states and provinces have legislation gov-erning how and where children should be car-ried in a vehicle. Find out the regulations exist-ing in your state or province. Recent accidentstatistics have shown that children are safer inrear seating positions than front seating posi-tions when properly restrained. A child restraintsystem can help protect a child in a vehicle.Here's what to look for when selecting a childrestraint system:

• It should have a label certifying that itmeets applicable Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards (FMVSS 213) – or in Can-ada, CMVSS 213.

• Make sure the child restraint system isapproved for the child's height, weight anddevelopment – the label required by thestandard or regulation, or instructions forinfant restraints, typically provide this infor-mation.

• In using any child restraint system, we urgeyou to carefully look over the instructionsthat are provided with the restraint. Be sureyou understand them and can use thedevice properly and safely in this vehicle.A misused child restraint system can resultin increased injuries for both the infant orchild and other occupants in the vehicle.

When a child has outgrown the child safetyseat, you should use the rear seat with thestandard seat belt fastened. The best way tohelp protect the child here is to place the childon a cushion so that the seat belt is properlylocated on the hips, see page 42. Legislationin your state or province may mandate the useof a child seat or cushion in combination withthe seat belt, depending on the child's age and/or size. Please check local regulations.

A specially designed and tested booster cush-ion can be obtained from your Volvo retailer.

USA: for children weighing 33 – 80 lbs.(15 – 36 kg) and 38 – 54 inches (97 – 137 cm)in height

Canada: for children weighing 40 – 80 lbs.(18 – 36 kg) and 40 – 54 inches (102 – 137 cm)in height

01 Safety

Child safety 01

34

WARNING

• Do not use child safety seats or childbooster cushions/backrests in the frontpassenger's seat. We also recommendthat children under 4 feet 7 inches(140 cm) in height who have outgrownthese devices sit in the rear seat with theseat belt fastened.

• On hot days, the temperature in thevehicle interior can rise very quickly.Exposure to these high temperaturesfor even a short period of time cancause heat-related injury or death.Small children are particularly at risk.

Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR)

To make child seat installation easier, eachseat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equip-ped with a locking mechanism to help keep theseat belt taut.

When attaching the seat belt to a child seat:

1. Attach the seat belt to the child seataccording to the child seat manufacturer'sinstructions.

2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible.

3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into thebuckle (lock) in the usual way.

4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut aroundthe child seat. A sound from the seat belt

retractor will be audible at this time and

is normal.

The belt will now be locked in place.

This function is automatically disabled

when the seat belt is unlocked and the belt

is fully retracted.

WARNING

Do not use child safety seats or childbooster cushions/backrests in the frontpassenger's seat. We also recommend thatchildren who have outgrown these devicessit in the rear seat with the seat belt properlyfastened.

Volvo's recommendations

Why does Volvo believe that no child should sitin the front seat of a vehicle? It's quite simplereally. A front airbag is a very powerful devicedesigned, by law, to help protect an adult.

Because of the size of the airbag and its speedof inflation, a child should never be placed inthe front seat, even if he or she is properly bel-ted or strapped into a child safety seat. Volvohas been an innovator in safety for over sev-enty-five years, and we'll continue to do our

part. But we need your help. Please rememberto put your children in the back seat, andbuckle them up.

Volvo has some very specific

recommendations:

• Always wear your seat belt.

• Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safetydevice which, when used with a three-point seat belt can help reduce seriousinjuries during certain types of accidents.Volvo recommends that you do not dis-connect the airbag system in your vehicle.

• Volvo strongly recommends that everyonein the vehicle be properly restrained.

• Volvo recommends that ALL occupants(adults and children) shorter than 4 feet7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the backseat of any vehicle with a front passengerside airbag.

• Drive safely!

01 Safety

Child restraint systems 01

��

35

Child restraints

G026491

Infant seat

There are three main types of child restraintsystems: infant seats, convertible seats, andbooster cushions. They are classified accord-ing to the child's age and size.

The following section provides general infor-

mation on securing a child restraint using athree-point seat belt. Refer to page 43 andpage 45 for information on securing a childrestraint using ISOFIX lower anchors and/ortop tether anchorages.

G026503

Convertible seat

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in thefront passenger seat of any vehicle with afront passenger airbag – not even if thePASSENGER AIRBAG OFF symbol nearthe rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehi-cles equipped with Occupant Weight Sen-sor). If the severity of an accident were tocause the airbag to inflate, this could lead toserious injury or death to a child seated inthis position.

G026489

Booster cushion

WARNING

Always refer to the child restraint manufac-turer's instructions for detailed informationon securing the restraint.

01 Safety

Child restraint systems 01

36

WARNING

• When not in use, keep the child restraintsystem secured or remove it from thepassenger compartment to help pre-vent it from injuring passengers in theevent of a sudden stop or collision.

• A small child's head represents a con-siderable part of its total weight and itsneck is still very weak. Volvo recom-mends that children up to age 4 travel,properly restrained, facing rearward. Inaddition, Volvo recommends that chil-dren should ride rearward facing, prop-erly restrained, as long as possible.

01 Safety

Infant seats 01

��

37

Securing an infant seat with a seat belt

G026417

Do not place the infant seat in the front passeng-er's seat

NOTE

Refer to page 43 and page 45 for infor-mation on securing a child restraint usingISOFIX lower anchors and/or top tetheranchorages.

G026493

Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat

WARNING

• An infant seat must be in the rear-facingposition only.

• The infant seat should not be positionedbehind the driver's seat unless there isadequate space for safe installation.

1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of thevehicle.

2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seataccording to the manufacturer's instruc-tions.

G026492

Fasten the seat belt

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in thefront passenger seat of any vehicle with afront passenger airbag – not even ifthe "Passenger airbag off" symbol nearthe rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehi-cles equipped with Occupant Weight Sen-sor). If the severity of an accident were tocause the airbag to inflate, this could lead toserious injury or death to a child seated inthis position.

01 Safety

Infant seats 01

38

3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latchplate into the buckle (lock) until a distinctclick is audible.

G026494

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt

4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat beltout as far as possible to activate the belt'sautomatic locking function.

G026498

Ensure that the seat is securely in place

NOTE

The locking retractor will automaticallyrelease when the seat belt is unbuckled andallowed to retract fully.

5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let theseat belt retract and pull it taut. A soundfrom the seat belt retractor's automaticlocking function will be audible at this timeand is normal. The seat belt should now belocked in place.

6. Push and pull the infant seat to ensure thatit is held securely in place by the seat belt.

WARNING

It should not be possible to move the childrestraint more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) in anydirection.

The infant seat can be removed by unbucklingthe seat belt and letting it retract completely.

01 Safety

Convertible seats 01

��

39

Securing a convertible seat with a seatbelt

G026420

Do not place the convertible seat in the front pas-senger's seat

NOTE

Refer to page 43 and page 45 for infor-mation on securing a child restraint usingISOFIX lower anchors and/or top tetheranchorages.

Convertible seats can be used in either a for-ward or rearward-facing position, dependingon the age and size of the child.

WARNING

Always use a convertible seat that is suita-ble for the child's age and size. See the con-vertible seat manufacturer's recommenda-tions.

G026503

Route the seat belt through the convertible seat

WARNING

A small child's head represents a consider-able part of its total weight and its neck isstill very weak. Volvo recommends that chil-dren up to age 4 travel, properly restrained,facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recom-mends that children should ride rearwardfacing, properly restrained, as long as pos-sible.

G026500

Fasten the seat belt

01 Safety


40

WARNING

• Convertible child seats should be instal-led in the rear seat only.

• A rear-facing convertible seat should notbe positioned behind the driver's seatunless there is adequate space for safeinstallation.

1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seatof the vehicle.

2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seataccording to the manufacturer's instruc-tions.


4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat beltout as far as possible to activate the belt'sautomatic locking function.

G026501

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt

NOTE

The locking retractor will automaticallyrelease when the seat belt is unbuckled andallowed to retract fully.

5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place,let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. Asound from the seat belt retractor's auto-matic locking function will be audible atthis time and is normal. The seat beltshould now be locked in place.

6. Push and pull the convertible seat toensure that it is held securely in place bythe seat belt.

G026502

Ensure that the seat is securely in place

WARNING

It should not be possible to move the childrestraint more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) in anydirection.

The convertible seat can be removed byunbuckling the seat belt and letting it retractcompletely.

01 Safety


41

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in thefront passenger seat of any vehicle with afront passenger airbag – not even if thePASSENGER AIRBAG OFF symbol nearthe rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehi-cles equipped with Occupant Weight Sen-sor). If the severity of an accident were tocause the airbag to inflate, this could lead toserious injury or death to a child seated inthis position.

01 Safety

Booster cushions 01

42

Securing a booster cushion

G026513

Position the child correctly on the booster cushion

Booster cushions are recommended for chil-dren who have outgrown convertible seats.

1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seatof the vehicle.

2. With the child properly seated on thebooster cushion, attach the seat belt to oraround the cushion according to the man-ufacturer's instructions.


G026517

Positioning the seat belt

4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut andfits snugly around the child.

WARNING

• The hip section of the three-point seatbelt must fit snugly across the child'ships, not across the stomach.

• The shoulder section of the three-pointseat belt should be positioned acrossthe chest and shoulder.

• The shoulder belt must never be placedbehind the child's back or under thearm.

01 Safety

ISOFIX lower anchors 01

��

43

Using the ISOFIX lower child seatanchors

G015268

ISOFIX lower child restraint anchors

Lower anchors for ISOFIX-equipped childseats are located in the second row, outboardseats, hidden below the backrest cushions.Symbols on the seat back upholstery mark theanchor positions (see the illustration).

To access the anchors:

1. Put the child restraint in position.

2. Kneel on the child restraint to press downthe seat cushion and locate the anchors byfeel.

3. Fasten the attachment on the childrestraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX loweranchors.

4. Firmly tension the lower child seat strapsaccording to the manufacturer's instruc-tions.

WARNING

The ISOFIX lower child restraint anchors areonly intended for use with child seats posi-tioned in the outboard seating positions.These anchors are not certified for use withany child restraint that is positioned in thecenter seating position. When securing achild restraint in the center seating position,use only the vehicle's center seat belt.

NOTE

• The rear seat's center position is notequipped with ISOFIX lower anchors.When installing a child restraint in thisposition, attach the restraint's top tetherstrap (if it is so equipped) to the toptether anchorage point and secure therestraint with the vehicle's center seatbelt.

• Always follow your child seat manufac-turer's installation instructions, and useboth ISOFIX lower anchors and toptethers whenever possible.

G031682

Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIXlower anchors

01 Safety

ISOFIX lower anchors 01

44

WARNING

Be sure to fasten the attachment correctlyto the anchor (see the illustration). If theattachment is not correctly fastened, thechild restraint may not be properly securedin the event of a collision.

01 Safety

Top tether anchors 01

45

Top tether anchors

G027032

Top tether anchorage points

Your vehicle is equipped with child restraint toptether anchorages in all second row seat posi-tions (second-row seats only in 7-seat models).

Using the top tether anchorages

• Place the child restraint on the rear seat.

• Route the top tether strap under the headrestraint and fasten its attachment to theanchorage.

WARNING

Be sure to fasten the child tether attachmentcorrectly to the anchor. If it is not correctlyfastened, the child seat may not be properlyrestrained in the event of a collision.

• Firmly tension the top tether strap accord-ing to the child restraint manufacturer'sinstructions. Tension the top tether straponly after the lower anchor straps or theseat belt have been firmly tensioned.

For securing the child restraint to ISOFIX loweranchors,see page 43.

WARNING

• Never route a top tether strap over thetop or around the head restraint. Itshould always be routed under the headrestraint.

• Child restraint anchorages are designedto withstand only those loads imposedby correctly fitted child restraints. Underno circumstances are they to be usedfor adult seat belts or harnesses. Theanchorages are not able to withstandexcessive forces on them in the event ofcollision if full harness seat belts or adultseat belts are installed to them. An adultwho uses a belt anchored in a childrestraint anchorage runs a great risk ofsuffering severe injuries should a colli-sion occur.

• Do not install rear speakers that requirethe removal of the top tether anchors orinterfere with the proper use of the toptether strap.

01 Safety

Child restraint registration and recalls 01

46

Registering a child restraint

Child restraints could be recalled for safetyreasons. You must register your child restraintto be reached in a recall. To stay informedabout child safety seat recalls, be sure to fill outand return the registration card that comeswith new child restraints.

Child restraint recall information is readily avail-able in both the U.S. and Canada. For recallinformation in the U.S., call the U.S. Govern-ment's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393.In Canada, visit Transport Canada's ChildSafety website at http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/childsafety/menu.htm.

01 Safety

Integrated booster cushion 01

��


Integrated booster cushion*

G031071

Volvo's own integrated booster cushion hasbeen specially designed to help safeguard achild seated in the rear seat. When using anintegrated booster cushion, the child must besecured with the vehicle's three-point seatbelt.

Use this booster cushion only with childrenwho weigh between 33 and 80 lbs (15 and36 kg) and whose height is between 38 and54 in (97 and 137 cm). In Canada, TransportCanada's weight recommendation is40 – 80 lbs (18 – 36 kg).

The booster cushion is designed to raise thechild higher, so that the shoulder strap crosses

over the child's collarbone, not over the child'sneck. If using a booster cushion does not resultin proper positioning of the shoulder strap,then the child should be placed in a properlysecured child restraint (see page 33 for infor-mation). The shoulder belt must never beplaced behind the child's back or under thearm.

WARNING

• Death or serious injury canoccur.

• Follow all instructions on the boostercushion and in the vehicle's owner'smanual.

• Make sure the booster cush-

ion is securely locked before

the child is seated.

• Use this booster cushion only with chil-dren who weigh between 33 and 80 lbs(15 and 36 kg) and whose height isbetween 38 and 54 in (97 and 137 cm).In Canada, Transport Canada's weightrecommendation is 40 – 80 lbs(18 - 36 kg).

• In the event of a collision while the inte-grated booster cushion was occupied,the entire booster cushion and seat beltmust be replaced. The booster cushionshould also be replaced if it is badlyworn or damaged in any way. This workshould be performed by an authorizedVolvo retailer only.

NOTE

Canada only: This cushion may be referredto as a built-in booster cushion.

01 Safety

Integrated booster cushion 01

48

G030708

Raising

1. Pull the handle at the front of the cushionforward.

2. Move the seat belt latch aside before rais-ing the cushion.

3. With both hands push the cushion rear-ward.

4. Push the cushion until it locks in place.

Lowering

1. Pull the handle at the front of the cushion-forward.

2. Pull the seat forward and press it downuntil it locks in place.

The booster cushion must be pressed downbefore the backrest can be folded down.

01 Safety

01

49

G020901


Instrument overview................................................................................ 52Instrument panel..................................................................................... 54Information display.................................................................................. 58Center console buttons........................................................................... 60Steering wheel adjustment..................................................................... 62Lighting panel.......................................................................................... 63Manually unlocking the fuel filler door.................................................... 65Left-side steering wheel lever................................................................. 66Right-side steering wheel lever............................................................... 67Hazard warning flashers......................................................................... 70Trip computer.......................................................................................... 71Cruise control.......................................................................................... 7312-volt sockets....................................................................................... 75Parking brake.......................................................................................... 76Hood/tailgate.......................................................................................... 77Power windows....................................................................................... 78Mirrors..................................................................................................... 80Power moonroof..................................................................................... 83HomeLink® Wireless Control System*................................................... 85

02INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS


Instrument overview

02

52

G00

0000


Instrument overview

02


Headlights/Parking lights

Panel vents

Display

Temperature gauge

Odometer/Trip odometer/Cruise controlindicator

Speedometer

Turn signal indicator lights

Tachometer

Ambient temperature gauge, clock, gearindicator

Fuel gauge

Indicator and warning symbols

Panel vents

Glove compartment

Hazard warning flashers

Audio system

Climate system controls

Windshield wiper/washer lever

Audio control buttons in steering wheel

Instrument panel

Horn

Cruise control buttons in steering wheel

Turn signals, High/low beams, READ-but-ton

Parking brake pedal

Parking brake release handle

Reading lights

Courtesy light

Moonroof control*

Seat belt reminder

Rearview mirror

Control panel in the driver's door

G029570

Central locking button

Lockout switch for rear seat power win-dows

Power window controls

Door mirror controls


Instrument panel

02

54

Instrument panel

G027133

Turn signal indicators – right/left

Text window – The text window displaysinformation and warning messages.

Temperature gauge – The pointer shouldbe approximately midway on the gaugewhen driving. Do not drive the vehicle if

the warning light is on. The text windowwill provide you with additional informa-tion. If the engine temperature remainshigh, check coolant level – see page 211.

Trip odometer – The trip odometers areused for measuring shorter distances. Theright-hand digit gives tenth of a mile/kilo-meter. Press the button for more than2 seconds to reset. Change between trip

odometers 1 and 2 using one short presson the button. – The display presents infor-mation and warning messages, the ambi-ent temperature, and the clock, etc. Whenthe ambient temperature is between 23°and 36 °F (–5° and +2 °C), a snowflakesymbol is shown in the display. This sym-bol serves as a warning for possible slip-pery road surfaces. Please note that thissymbol does not indicate a fault with yourcar. At low speeds, or when the car is notmoving, the temperature readings may beslightly higher than the actual ambient tem-perature.

Odometer

Speedometer

Warning symbol

High beam indicator

Tachometer – The tachometer showsengine speed in thousands of revolutionsper minute (rpm). Do not drive continuouslywith the needle in the red area of the dial,which indicates maximum allowableengine rpm range. Instead, shift to a highergear or slow the vehicle down. The enginemanagement system will automaticallyprevent excessively high engines speeds.This will be noticeable as a pronouncedunevenness in engine speed.


Instrument panel

02

��

55

Gear and driving mode indicator – The cur-rently selected driving mode is displayedhere. If you use the Geartronic function onthe automatic transmission, the currentlyselected gear will be displayed.

Ambient temperature gauge – This displayindicates the air temperature outside yourvehicle. A "snowflake" symbol in the textwindow is displayed when the temperatureis in the range of 23 – 36 °F (–5 – +2 °C).Please note that this symbol does not indi-cate a fault with your vehicle. At lowspeeds or when the vehicle is not moving,the temperature readings may be slightlyhigher than the actual ambient tempera-ture.

Clock/set button – Turn the button to setthe clock.

Fuel gauge – see page 270 for fuel tankvolume. When the warning light in thegauge comes on, the vehicle should berefueled as soon as possible. The trip com-puter section (see page 71) providesmore information on fuel level and con-sumption.

Indicator and warning symbols – The indi-cator and warning symbols1light up whenyou turn the ignition key to the driving posi-tion (position II) before starting.

G027134

This shows that the symbols are functioning.When the engine starts, all symbols go out. Ifthe engine is not started within 5 seconds, allsymbols except CHECK ENGINE and go out. Certain symbols may not have theirfunctions illustrated, depending on the vehi-cle's equipment. The symbol for the parkingbrake goes out when the parking brake isreleased.

Warning symbol in center of the

instrument panel

This symbol shines as a red or yel-low light depending on the severityof the discovered fault.

Red symbol – Stop the vehicle as soon aspossible in a suitable location and read themessage shown in the text window. The sym-bol and accompanying text will remain on untilthe fault has been corrected.

Yellow symbol – Follow the instructionsshown in the text window. The text can beerased by pressing the READ button (seepage 58), or will disappear automatically aftertwo minutes.

NOTE

When the message TIME FOR REGULARSERVICE is displayed, the text can beerased and the yellow symbol light can beturned off by pressing the READ button.The text will disappear and the symbol lightwill go out automatically after two minutes.

1 On certain engines, the symbol for low oilpressure is not used. Instead, a text warning is provided in the information display, see page 209.


Instrument panel

02

56

Seat belt reminder

This symbol lights up to indicatethat the driver has not fastened his/her seat belt.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

If this light comes on while thevehicle is being driven, or remainson for longer than approximately10 seconds after the vehicle hasbeen started, the SRS system's

diagnostic functions have detected a fault in aseat belt lock or pretensioner, a front airbag,side impact airbag, and/or an inflatable curtain.Have the system(s) inspected by a trained andqualified Volvo service technician as soon aspossible.

BRAKE – Brake failure warning light

If the light comes on while driving or braking,stop immediately, open the hood and checkthe brake fluid level in the reservoir. seepage 212.

Canadian models are equippedwith this warning light.

If the BRAKE and ABS warning lights come

on at the same time, this could indicate a

fault in the brake system.

• Stop the vehicle in a suitable place andswitch off the engine.

• Restart the engine.

• If both warning lights go off, no furtheraction is required.

• If both lights are still on after the engine hasbeen restarted, switch off the engine againand check the brake fluid level (seepage 212 for the location of the brake fluidreservoir).

If the brake fluid level is above the MIN mark,drive carefully to a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician and have the brake systeminspected.

WARNING

If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in thereservoir or if a Brake failure – Serviceurgent message is displayed in the textwindow: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicletowed to a trained and qualified Volvo serv-ice technician and have the brake systeminspected.

PARK BRAKE Parking brake applied

This light will be on when the parking brake(hand brake) is applied. The parking brakepedal is located on the left side of the driver'sfootwell, see page 75 for more information.

Canadian models are equippedwith this symbol.

Oil pressure warning light2

If the light comes on while driv-

ing, stop the vehicle and then

stop the engine immediately and

check the engine oil level, seepage 58. If the light stays on after

restart, have the vehicle towed to the nearesttrained and qualified Volvo service technician.After hard driving, the light may come on occa-sionally when the engine is idling. This is nor-mal, provided it goes off when the enginespeed is increased.

Generator warning light

If the light comes on while theengine is running, have the charg-ing system checked.

2 On certain engines, the symbol for low oilpressure is not used. Instead, a text warningis provided in the information display, see page 58.


Instrument panel

02

57

Rear fog light

This light indicates that the foglight is on.

CHECK ENGINE Malfunction indicator

light

On-Board Diagnostics II (OBDII): As you drive,a computer called "OBDII" monitors your vehi-cle's engine, transmission, electrical and emis-sion systems. The CHECK ENGINE light willlight up if the computer senses a condition thatpotentially may need correcting. When thishappens, please have your vehicle checked bya trained and qualified Volvo service technicianas soon as possible.

A CHECK ENGINE light may have many cau-ses. Sometimes, you may not notice a changein your vehicle's behavior. Even so, an uncor-rected condition could hurt fuel economy,emission cleanliness, and driveability.Extended driving without correcting the causecould even damage other components in yourvehicle.

Canadian models are equippedwith this warning light.

ABS (Anti-lock brake system)

If the warning light comes on, thereis a malfunction of the ABS system(the standard braking system willstill function). The vehicle shouldbe driven to a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician for inspection. Seepage 145 for additional information.

DSTC system

The Dynamic Stability and TractionControl system (DSTC) isexplained in greater detail on page147.

Tire pressure monitoring light

See page 189 for more informa-tion on this function.

Turn signal indicator – trailer (certain

models)

If you are towing a trailer, this lightwill flash simultaneously with theturn signals on the trailer. If thelight does not flash when signaling,neither the trailer's turn signals nor

the vehicle's turn signals are functioning.


Information display

02

58

Message in the text windows

G026979

When a warning light in the instrument panelcomes on, a message is also displayed in thetext window. After you have read the message,you can erase it by pressing button A (see illus-tration).

NOTE

Certain messages cannot be erased untilthe condition has been corrected.

If a warning message is displayed when e.g.you are using the trip computer, this messagemust be erased before you can access the

function of your choice. Press button A to erasethe warning message.

You can scroll through the stored messages bypressing button A (see illustration). The textwindow can be cleared (the message will bereturned to memory) by pressing button Aagain.

Message Meaning

STOP SAFELY Stop the car in a safe place and switch off the engine to help prevent the risk of serious damage.

STOP ENGINE Stop the car in a safe place and switch off the engine to help prevent the risk of serious damage.

SERVICE URGENT Take your vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for inspection immediately.

SEE MANUAL Refer to your owner's manual. For additional information, please contact your Volvo retailer.

SERVICE REQUIRED Take your vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for inspection at your convenience(but preferably before the next scheduled maintenance service).

FIX NEXT SERVICE Have the system affected inspected at the next scheduled maintenance service.


Information display

02

59

Message Meaning

TIME FOR REGULAR SERVICE This message will be displayed at 7,500 mile (12,000 km) intervals, after 750 hours of driving or after12 months, whichever occurs first, to remind the driver that the service interval has been exceeded. Themessage will be displayed for 2 minutes each time the vehicle is started until reset by a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician.

OIL LEVEL LOW – FILL OILA Check the oil level and top up if necessary, see page 209.

OIL LEVEL LOW – STOP SAFELYB Stop as soon as possible and switch off the engine, check the oil level and top up if necessary, seepage 209.

OIL LEVEL LOW – STOP ENGINEB Stop as soon as possible and switch off the engine, check the oil level and top up if necessary, seepage 209.

OIL LEVEL LOW – SEE MANUALB Stop as soon as possible and switch off the engine, check the oil level and top up if necessary, seepage 209.

DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF The stability system's spin control function has been turned off, see page 147 for details.

A The yellow warning symbol also lights up (see page 54).B The red warning symbol also lights up (see page 54).


Center console buttons

02


G026944

Active Bending Lights*

The beams of these headlightsadjust laterally to help light up acurve according to movementsof the steering wheel when thevehicle is turning. This functionis activated automatically when

the engine is started and can be deactivated/reactivated by pressing the button. The indica-tor light in the button is on when the function isactivated, also see page 63.

Rear seat air conditioning*

This button controls theoptional rear seat air condition-ing system on seven-seat mod-els.

Folding door mirrors*

Press the button and release itto fold the door mirrors in orout. On certain models, whenthe button is pressed, theremay be a long pause before themirrors move. Pressing the but-

ton again during this pause may erase your firstbutton press. If this happens, wait ten secondsand press the button one more time.

The mirrors cannot be adjusted during the firstten seconds after they have been folded out.


Center console buttons

02


NOTE

If the door mirrors have been inadvertentlypushed out of position (in a car wash, park-ing lot, etc.) manually return them to normalposition. If mirror adjustment does not seemto operate after manual folding, reset thefolding mirrors as follows:

• Turn the ignition key to position II.

• Manually fold the mirror(s) to the normalposition.

• Press the button to fold both mirrors in.

• Press the button again to fold the mir-rors out to their normal position.

Park Assist*

This system provides an audi-ble warning when the vehicle isbeing parked or if it is drivenclose to a person or object. Formore information seepage 149.

NOTE

The system activates automatically whenthe engine is started, and can be deacti-vated by pressing this button (e.g. whentowing a trailer) or reactivated if necessary.

Auxiliary lights

This button is used to switch onauxiliary lights (if installed). Alight in the button will light up toindicate that the auxiliary lightsare illuminated.

12 volt socket

This 12 volt socket can be usedto plug in certain accessoriessuch as cellular telephones,etc. The ignition key must be inposition I (or higher) for the aux-iliary socket to function.

NOTE

The auxiliary sockets can also be used forcigarette lighters, which are available asaccessories at your Volvo retailer.

Power child locks*

For more information on thisfunction, see page 126.


Steering wheel adjustment

02

62

G026999

Both the height and the reach of the steeringwheel can be adjusted to a comfortable posi-tion for the driver. Pull down the lever on theleft of the steering column. Adjust the steeringwheel to a suitable position and press the leverback into place to lock the steering wheel in thenew position. Check that the steering wheel islocked in the new position.

WARNING

Never adjust the steering wheel while driv-ing.


Lighting panel

02

��


Headlight/parking light switch

Front fog lights

Rear fog light

Instrument panel lighting

Fuel filler door unlock button

Parking lights

The front and rear parking lights can be turnedon even when the ignition is switched off.

� Turn switch (1) to position .

The license plate lights also illuminate when theparking lights are switched on.

Headlights

1. Turn the ignition key to position II.

2. The low beam headlights (daytime runninglights) illuminate automatically, exceptwhen the light switch (1) is in position

1.

For information on switching between high andlow beams, see page 66.

NOTE

Active Bending Lights*: Turn the headlightswitch to position 0 to activate a daylightsensor, which automatically switches thelow beams on or off, depending on ambientlight conditions. When driving in daylight,the headlights will switch off and the day-time running lights will come on. In dark-ness, the daytime running lights will switchoff and the Active Bending Lights will switchon.

G020789

Headlight pattern with the Active Bending Lightfunction deactivated (left) and activated (right)

1 On Canadian models, the daytime running lights will remain on with the light switch in this position.


Lighting panel

02


Active Bending Lights (ABL)*

When this function is activated, the headlightbeams adjust laterally to help light up a curveaccording to movements of the steering wheel(see the right-pointing beam in the illustration).

The ABL function is activated automaticallywhen the engine is started and can be deacti-vated/reactivated by pressing the button in thecenter console (see page 60.

Fog lights

Front fog lights*

The front fog lights can be used in combinationwith either the headlights or the parking lights.


2. Press button (2) to turn on the front foglights.

An indicator light in the button illuminates whenthe front fog lights are on.

Rear fog light

The single rear fog light is located in the driver'sside of the vehicle.

The rear fog light will only function in combi-nation with the high/low beam headlights or theoptional front fog lights.


2. Press button (3) to turn on the rear fog light.

An indicator light in the button illuminates whenthe rear fog light is on.

NOTE

The rear fog light is considerably brighterthan the normal tail lights and should beused only when conditions such as fog, rain,snow, smoke or dust reduce visibility forother vehicles to less than 500 ft.(150 meters).

Instrument panel lighting

The instrument panel lighting illuminates whenthe ignition key is in position II and the lightswitch (1) is in either position or .

� Move the thumb wheel (4) up to increasebrightness or down to decrease bright-ness.

Unlocking the fuel filler door

Press button (5) when the vehicle is at a stand-still to unlock the fuel filler door. Please notethat the fuel filler door will remain unlocked untilthe vehicle begins to move forward. An audibleclick will be heard when the fuel filler doorrelocks.

NOTE

If the fuel filler door does not unlock after thebutton has been pressed, drive the vehicleat a speed of at least 5 mph (8 km/h), stopthe vehicle, and press the button again.

For information on unlocking the fuel filler doormanually, see page 65.


Manually unlocking the fuel filler door

02

65

G027077

Panel on passenger's side of cargo area

To manually unlock the fuel filler door

1. Open the upper and lower sections of thetailgate, and fold up the rear section of thecargo area floor.

2. If the vehicle is equipped with the optionalgrocery bag holder, detach the holder'sbands.

3. Remove the corner panel from the floor ofthe cargo area.

4. Open the cover in the side panel by pullingthe tab upward/outward.

5. Pull down the insulating material to accessthe fuel filler door motor.

G027034

6. Move the catch rearward to unlock the fuelfiller door lock, or move it forward to lockthe filler door.


Left-side steering wheel lever

02

66

Lever positions

G026954

Turn signals, lane change position

Turn signals, position for normal turns

High beam flash

Toggle between high and low beams,Home Safe lighting

Turn signals

When turning

Move the lever as far up or down as possible(to position 2) to start the turn signals. The turnsignals will be cancelled automatically by themovement of the steering wheel, or the levercan be returned to its initial position by hand.

When changing lanes

The driver can automatically flash the turn sig-nals 3 times by:

• Moving the turn signal lever up or down toposition (1) and releasing it.

• Moving the lever up or down to position (2)and immediately back to its original posi-tion.

NOTE

• This automatic flashing sequence canbe interrupted by immediately movingthe lever in the opposite direction.

• If the turn signal indicator flashes fasterthan normal, check for a burned-outturn signal bulb.

High/low beam headlights

Continuous high beams


2. With the light switch in position , (seepage 63) pull the turn signal lever towardthe steering wheel to toggle between highand low beams.

High beam flash


2. Pull the turn signal lever to position (3). Thehigh beams will remain on until the lever isreleased.

Home safe lighting

When leaving your vehicle at night, home safelighting can illuminate the area in front of thevehicle.

1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

2. Pull the turn signal lever as far as possibletoward the steering wheel and release it.

3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors.

The headlights and parking lights will illuminateand remain on for 301, 60 or 90 seconds. Thetime interval can be changed by a trained andqualified Volvo service technician.

1 Factory setting


Right-side steering wheel lever

02

��

67

Windshield wipers

G026953

Thumb wheel

Rain sensor on/off

Windshield wipers off

If the lever is in the 0 position andyou move it upwards, the wiperswill sweep one stroke at a time foras long as you hold the lever up.

Single sweep position

Move the lever slightly upwardfrom the 0 position for one sweepof the wipers. The lever returnsautomatically to 0 when released.

Intermittent wiper function

With the lever in this position, youcan set the wiper interval by twist-ing the control ring (1) upward toincrease wiper speed or down-ward to decrease the speed.

Windshield washer/headlight washer

(certain models)

When the lever is pulled to wash the wind-shield, high pressure jets mounted in thebumper will spray the headlights.

CAUTION

• Use ample washer fluid when washingthe windshield to avoid scratching theglass. The windshield should be thor-oughly wet when the wipers are in oper-ation.

• Before using the wipers, ice and snowshould be removed from the wind-shield/rear window. Be sure the wiperblades are not frozen in place.

• To conserve washer fluid in driving condi-tions where the windshield washers areused frequently, the headlights will only bewashed once for every five times the wind-shield is washed within a 10-minute period.

• A short pull on the lever will wash the wind-shield only.

• When approximately 1 US quart (1 liter)remains in the washer fluid reservoir, theheadlights will not be washed when thelever is pulled to conserve washer fluid forthe windshield.

Continuous wiper function

Top arrow: normal speed

Bottom arrows: higher speed



02


Tailgate wiper/washer

G027127

Intermittent wiping: Press the uppersection of the switch

Neutral position: The wiper is switchedoff

Normal (continuous) wiping: Press thelower section of the switch

Move the lever forward to start the tailgatewasher. After washing the rear window, thewiper will make several additional sweeps.

Tailgate wiper and reverse gear

If the front wipers are on and the transmissionis put into reverse gear, the tailgate wiper willgo into intermittent wiping function1.

If the tailgate wiper is already in normal wipingfunction, the normal wiping function will con-tinue.

Rain sensor*

The rain sensor automatically regulates wiperspeed according to the amount of water on thewindshield.

The sensitivity of the sensor can be adjustedby twisting ring (1) up (the wipers will sweep thewindshield more frequently) or down (the wip-ers will sweep the windshield less frequently).

Activating the rain sensor:

1. Turn the ignition key to at least position Iand put the windshield wiper lever in posi-tion 0.

2. Press button (2), see page 67.> A light in the button will light up to indi-

cate that the rain sensor is active.

Deactivating the rain sensor:

• Press button (2), see page 67.

or

• Move the windshield wiper lever down toanother position. Moving the lever up willnot deactivate the rain sensor. Doing sowill cause the wipers to sweep the wind-shield until the lever is released, at whichtime the wipers return to rain sensor mode.

The rain sensor is also deactivated when thekey is removed from the ignition.

CAUTION

The rain sensor should be deactivated whenwashing the vehicle in an automatic carwash, etc. If the rain sensor function is lefton, the wipers will start inadvertently in thecar wash and could be damaged.

1 Consult your Volvo retailer if you would like to have this function deactivated.



02


IR-reflecting windshield*

Section of the windshield where the IR-coating isnot applied

An optional factory-installed infrared (IR) coa-ting can be applied to the windshield to helpprotect the cabin from the sun's heat and thefading effect of sunlight on upholstery, panels,etc.

Electronic equipment such as garage dooropeners, electronic toll tags and similar devi-ces should not be placed on sections of thewindshield with the IR coating because thiscould affect their function and limit their range.

For best performance, place the device on thesection of the windshield without the IR coating(see the area marked in the illustration).



02

70


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

ABC DEF

GHI JKL MNO

PQRS TUV WXYZ

0* #

POWER

VOLUMECDAM FM

G027096

The four-way flasher should be used to indi-cate that the vehicle has become a traffic haz-ard. To activate the flashers, press the triangu-lar button in the center dash. Press the buttonagain to turn off the flashers.

NOTE

Regulations regarding the use of the hazardwarning flasher may vary, depending onwhere you live.

Rear window and door mirror defroster

Press the switch to start heat-ing the rear window and doormirrors to remove ice or con-densation. A light in the switchwill light up.

A timer automatically switches off the heatingafter approximately 12 minutes. The LED willgo out correspondingly.


Trip computer

02

��


Trip computer*

G026956

READ (press to acknowledge/confirm/erase a message)

Thumb wheel (used to scroll among the tripcomputer menus)

RESET

The trip computer stores information gatheredfrom several systems in your vehicle and hasfour menus that can be displayed in the textwindow.

• Driving distance on current fuel reserve

• Average fuel consumption

• Current fuel consumption

• Average speed

• Current speed in mph (Canadian modelsonly)

• DSTC (see page 147 for detailed informa-tion)

NOTE

Warning messages from the vehicle's moni-toring systems will override the trip com-puter function. If a warning message is dis-played in the text window while you areusing the trip computer, you must acknowl-edge the message by pressing button A.Press button A again to return to the tripcomputer function.

1. Trip computer controls and functions

The trip computer functions can be accessedby twisting INFO (B) one step at a time in eitherdirection. Twisting a final time returns you tothe original function.

The trip computer can be reset (current datawill be erased from system memory) by press-ing RESET (button C).

2. Driving distance on current fuel

reserve

This function shows the approximate distancethat can be driven on the fuel remaining in thetank. The calculation is based on average fuelconsumption during the last 20 miles (30 km)

of driving and the amount of fuel remaining inthe tank when the reading was taken.

When "----" is displayed in the text window,refuel as soon as possible.

3. Average fuel consumption

This value indicates fuel consumption since thelast time the trip computer was reset (by press-ing RESET, button C). When the engine isswitched off, information on fuel consumptionis stored and remains in system memory untilthe RESET (button C) is pressed again.

4. Current fuel consumption

This value indicates the current fuel consump-tion, based on readings taken once per sec-ond. When the vehicle is not moving, "----" willbe displayed.

5. Average speed

This value indicates average speed since thelast time the trip computer was reset (by press-ing RESET, button C). When the engine isswitched off, information on average speed isstored and remains in system memory until theRESET (button C) is pressed again.


Trip computer

02

72

6. Current speed in miles per hour

(Canadian models only)

This function provides the driver with an instan-taneous conversion of the vehicle's currentspeed from km/h to mph.

NOTE

Trip computer readings may vary slightlydepending on the circumference of the tireson the vehicle and driving style.


Cruise control

02

��

73

Engaging the cruise control function

G027098

The cruise control panel is located on the leftside of the steering wheel hub.

NOTE

This does not set the vehicle's speed.

1. Press the CRUISE button.> CRUISE will be displayed in the infor-

mation window in the instrument panel.

2. Press + or – to set the current speed.> CRUISE-ON will be displayed in the

information window in the instrumentpanel.

Increasing or decreasing speed

G027139

Use + or – in the following ways to increase ordecrease the vehicle's speed:

1. Press and hold down + or – until the vehiclereaches the desired speed.

2. Press + or – for approximately a half sec-ond and release the button to increase ordecrease vehicle speed by approximately1 mph (1.6 km/h).

NOTE

Cruise control will not function at speedsbelow 20 mph. (30 km/h).

Braking

• Cruise control is automatically disengagedwhen the brake pedal is depressed. Thecurrently set speed is stored in memory.

• Pressing resume will return the vehicleto the previously set speed.

Acceleration

Momentary acceleration, such as when pass-ing another vehicle, does not affect cruise con-trol operation. The vehicle will automaticallyreturn to the previously set speed when yourelease the accelerator pedal.

Disengaging cruise control

To disengage cruise control, press theCRUISE button. CRUISE or CRUISE-ON willno longer be displayed in the information win-dow in the instrument panel.

NOTE

Cruise control is automatically disengagedif:

• the engine is switched off

• the gear selector is placed in (N) Neutral

• the wheels start to spin or lock

• if an increase in speed is maintained formore than one minute

• if the vehicle's speed falls belowapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h).


Cruise control

02

74

Temporarily disengaging the cruisecontrol

1. Press 0 to temporarily disengage cruisecontrol.> CRUISE will be displayed in the infor-

mation window in the instrument panel.

2. Depress the brake pedal.

Pressing "resume" causes the vehicle toreturn to the previously set speed.

WARNING

Cruise control should not be used in heavytraffic or when driving on wet or slipperyroads, or when driving on unpaved oruneven road surfaces. Cruise control maynot maintain set speed on steep down-grades.


12-volt sockets

02


These 12 volt sockets can be used to plug incertain accessories such as cellular tele-phones, etc.

The ignition key must be in at least position I

for the sockets in the front seat and the optionalsocket at the rear of the center console to func-tion.

12-volt socket in the cargo compartment

Fold down the lid to use the socket. This socketcan be used even if the ignition is switched off.

NOTE

• If the 12-volt sockets are used while theengine is not running, there is a risk thatthe vehicle's battery will be discharged.

• If the ignition is switched off and adevice drawing more than 0.1 A is con-nected to a socket, a battery warningwill be displayed in the text window.

• The covers should be kept on when theauxiliary sockets are not in use.

• Maximum current from the sockets is15 A.

G028425

12-volt socket at the rear of the center console*

Ashtrays/cigarette lighter

The auxiliary sockets can also be used for cig-arette lighters.

Ashtrays and lighters are available as acces-sories. Please contact your Volvo retailer.

G027099

12-volt socket in the cargo compartment


Parking brake

02

76

G026992

Parking brake pedal

Handle for releasing the parking brake

The parking brake pedal is located under thedashboard, to the left of the brake pedal.

NOTE

The indicator light will light up even if theparking brake has only been partiallyap-plied.

When applying the parking brake


2. Press down pedal (1) firmly to its full extent.

3. Release the brake pedal and ensure thatthe vehicle is at a standstill.

4. If the vehicle rolls, the parking brake pedalmust be pushed down more firmly.

5. When parking a vehicle always put the gearselector in P.

Parking on a hill

• If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the frontwheels so that they point away from thecurb.

• If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn thefront wheels so that they point toward thecurb.

Releasing the parking brake


2. Pull handle (2).

NOTE

If you inadvertently pull the plastic cover, itcan be pressed back into place.

WARNING

Press down the parking brake pedal firmlyto its full extent.


Hood/tailgate

02

77

Opening/closing the hood

G026995

Opening the hood

1. Pull the lever located under the left side ofthe dashboard to release the hood lock.

2. Lift the hood slightly.

3. Press up the release control located underthe front edge of the hood and lift.

To close the hood, place your hand on it andpress down until the hood locks in the closedposition.

WARNING

• Do not grasp the ribs in the grille whenclosing the hood. If your fingers pro-trude through the grille, they could beinjured on components in the enginecompartment as the grille closes. Werecommend pressing down on the hoodto close it.

• Check that the hood locks properlywhen closed!

Opening the tailgate

G027005

To open the upper section of the tailgate, pullthe handle downward.

To fold down the lower section of the tailgate,pull handle upward.


Power windows

02

78

Power windows

The power windows are controlled by buttonsin the arm rests. The ignition switch must beON1 (ignition key in position I, II or the enginerunning) for the electrically operated windowsto function.

To lower: Press down the front edge of the but-ton to the first detent ("stop").

To raise: Lightly pull up the front edge of thebutton to the first detent ("stop").

Auto up/down function (front doors only):

Either front door window can be opened orclosed automatically.

Auto down: Press the front part of the buttonas far down as possible and release it immedi-ately. To stop the window at any time, pull thebutton up.

Auto up: Pull the front part of the button up asfar as possible and release it immediately. Tostop the window at any time, press the buttondown.

G029571

Power window controls

Front windows

Rear windows

NOTE

If a window is obstructed during auto-up, itwill automatically reverse direction andreturn to its starting position. If a window isrepeatedly obstructed during auto-up oper-ation, an overload protection circuit breakerwill temporarily halt window function. Thewindow will return to normal function after abrief cool-down period.

WARNING

Always remove the ignition key when thevehicle is unattended.

Make sure that the windows are completelyunobstructed before they are operated.

Never leave children unattended in the vehi-cle.

NOTE

To reduce buffeting wind noise if the rearwindows are opened, also open the frontwindows slightly.

G029572

1 The power windows will also function after the ignition has been switched off as long as neither of the front doors has been opened.


Power windows

02

79

Lockout switch for rear windows

The power rear door windows can be disabledby a switch located on the driver's door (seeillustration).

If the light in the switch is OFF: The rear doorwindows can be raised or lowered with thebuttons on the rear door armrests or with thebuttons on the driver's door armrest.

If the light in the switch is ON: The rear doorwindows can only be raised or lowered with thebuttons on the driver's door armrest.

G029573

Power window on the front passenger's

side

The control for the power window in the frontpassenger's seat operates that window only.

G029574

Power windows in the rear doors

The rear door windows can be operated withthe control on each door and the switch on thedriver's door. If the light in the switch for block-ing power windows in the rear doors (locatedin the driver's door control panel) is on, the reardoor windows can only be operated from thedriver's door.


Mirrors

02


Rearview mirror

G026660

To reduce glare from the headlights of follow-ing vehicles, use the control to switch betweenthe normal and night-driving positions.

Normal position

Night position, reduces glare from follow-ing headlights

Autodim function*

The autodim function reacts to headlights fromfollowing traffic and automatically reducesglare.

NOTE

This function is automatically switched offwhen the gear selector is placed in theReverse position.

Rearview mirror with compass*

G026965

The upper left-hand corner of the rearview mir-ror has an integrated display that shows thecompass direction toward which the car ispointing. Eight different directions can be dis-played: N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and NW. Thedisplay shows your car's orientation withrespect to true north.

If the compass is activated, it will be displayedautomatically when the ignition is in postilion II

or when the engine is running. The compasscan be switched off or on by pressing the insetbutton on the rear side of the mirror (see theinset illustration). This can be done withstraightened paperclip or similar object. Thebutton is recessed approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm)in the mirror.

G026409

Magnetic zones

The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.The compass is initially set for the zone towhich the car was delivered, and shouldalways be adjusted if the car is driven to a newmagnetic zone. To do so:

1. Switch the ignition to position II.


Mirrors

02

��

81

2. Press the button on the rear side of themirror with straightened paperclip or simi-lar object for approximately 3 seconds untilZONE is displayed. The number of the cur-rent magnetic zone will also be displayed.

3. Press the button repeatedly until the num-ber for the desired zone (1 – 15) is dis-played.

CAL

ZONE

CAL

ZONE

G026950

Calibrating the compass

After several seconds, the compass headingwill again be displayed, and the change ofmagnetic zones is complete.

Calibrating the compass

1. Stop the car in a large, open area, awayfrom traffic.

2. Turn off as many electrical devices in thecar as possible to avoid interference withthe compass (e.g. audio system, etc).

3. Using a pen or similar object, hold the but-ton (on the rear side of the mirror)depressed for at least 6 sec-onds. "CAL" will be displayed.

4. Drive slowly in a circle at a maximum speedof 5 m.p.h. (8 km/h) until CAL is no longerdisplayed.

NOTE

This step can also be done by driving nor-mally until CAL is no longer displayed.

Calibration is complete.

Power door mirrors

G029575

The mirror control switches are located on thedriver's door armrest.

Driver's side: Press the L button (a light in theswitch will light up) to activate the adjustmentcontrol and then use this control to adjust thedriver's door mirror.

Passenger's door: Press the R button (a lightin the switch will light up) and then use theadjustment control to adjust the passenger'sdoor mirror.

After you have adjusted the mirror(s), press theL or R switch again (the light will go out) todeactivate the adjustment control.


Mirrors

02


For information about the optional folding mir-ror function see page 60.

WARNING

The mirrors should always be adjusted priorto driving. Objects seen in the passenger'sside wide-angle door mirror are closer thanthey appear to be.

Mirror memory function (with the central

locking system)*

If you lock the vehicle and later unlock it withthe same remote key and open the driver'sdoor, the door mirrors (and the driver's seat)will automatically move to the position theywere in when you left the vehicle. This featurewill work in the same way with all of the remotekey transmitters (up to 3) that you use with yourvehicle. This feature will not function if you lockyour vehicle with the key.

Water repellent glass

The side door mirrors can be treatedwith a water repellent coating. The

symbol to the left indicates these windowshave this coating.

The coating improves vision by causing thewater to run off quickly.

For information on cleaning this type of glass,see page 196.

CAUTION

Use the heating function to remove ice,snow, or mist from the mirrors.


Power moonroof

02

��

83

Power moonroof

G007503

To operate the moonroof, turn the ignition keyto position I or II, or start the engine. The moon-roof can be operated in two ways:

Tilt position

Sliding moonroof

G027010

Tilt position

Open: With the moonroof closed, push up therear edge of the switch (position 5 in the illus-tration in the center column).

Close: Pull down and hold the rear edge of theswitch (position 6 in the illustration in the centercolumn) until the moonroof has closed com-pletely.

Sliding moonroof

Manual open: Pull the switch rearward to posi-tion 3 and hold it until the moonroof hasopened to the position of your choice.

Auto open: Pull the switch as far back as pos-sible (position 4) and release it to automaticallyslide open the moonroof to the "comfort"1

position. Pull the switch rearward again toopen the moonroof completely.

Manual close: Push the switch to position 2and hold it until the moonroof has closed com-pletely or to the position of your choice.

Auto close: Push the switch forward as far aspossible (position 1) and release it to automat-ically close the moonroof.

CAUTION

• Remove ice and snow before openingthe moonroof.

• Do not operate the moonroof if it is fro-zen closed.

• Never place heavy objects on themoonroof.

1 A position where the moonroof is not quite fully open, which helps alleviate "rumbling" wind noise.


Power moonroof

02

84

WARNING

• Never open/close the moonroof if it isobstructed in any way when in opera-tion.

• Never allow a child to operate themoonroof.

• Never extend any object or body partthrough the open moonroof, even if thevehicle's ignition is completelyswitched off.

• Never leave a child alone in a vehicle.

If the moonroof is obstructed during auto-closeoperation, it will automatically reverse directionand return to its starting position. If the moon-roof is repeatedly obstructed during auto-closeoperation, an overload circuit breaker will tem-porarily halt moonroof function. The moonroofwill return to normal function after a brief cool-down period.

G020157

Sun visor

The optional moonroof also features a slidingsun visor. The visor slides open automaticallywhen the moonroof is opened. The visor mustbe closed manually.

WARNING

The moonroof must never be obstructed inany way when in operation.


HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

02

��


Introduction

G030070

The HomeLink1 Wireless Control System pro-vides a convenient way to replace up to threehand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmittersused to activate devices such as gate opera-tors, garage door openers, entry door locks,security systems, even home lighting. Addi-tional HomeLink information can be found onthe Internet at www.homelink.com.

WARNING

• If you use HomeLink to open a garagedoor or gate, be sure no one is near thegate or door while it is in motion.

• When programming a garage dooropener, it is advised to park outside ofthe garage.

• Do not use HomeLink with any garagedoor opener that lacks safety stop andreverse features as required by U.S.federal safety standards (this includesany garage door opener model manu-factured before April 1, 1982). A garagedoor that cannot detect an object - sig-naling the door to stop and reverse -does not meet current U.S. federalsafety standards. For more information,contact HomeLink at:www.homelink.com.

Retain the original transmitter of the RF deviceyou are programming for use in other vehiclesas well as for future HomeLink programming. Itis also suggested that upon the sale of thevehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons beerased for security purposes. Refer to “ErasingHomeLink Buttons”.

Programming HomeLink

NOTE

Some vehicles may require the ignitionswitch to be turned on or to the second(“accessories”) position for programmingand/or operation of HomeLink. It is also rec-ommended that a new battery be placed inthe hand-held transmitter of the devicebeing programmed to HomeLink for quickertraining and accurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

1. Position the end of your hand-held trans-mitter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away from theHomeLink button you wish to programwhile keeping the indicator light in view.

2. Simultaneously press and hold both thechosen HomeLink and hand-held transmit-ter buttons until the HomeLink indicatorlight changes from a slow to a rapidly blink-ing light. Now you may release both theHomeLink and hand-held transmitter but-tons.

1 HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.



02


NOTE

Some devices may require you to replacethis Programming Step 2 with proceduresnoted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian Pro-gramming” section. If the HomeLink indica-tor light does not change to a rapidly blink-ing light after performing these steps, con-tact HomeLink at www.homelink.com.

3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and

release the programmed HomeLink but-ton up to two separate times to activate thedoor. If the door does not activate, pressand hold the just-trained HomeLink buttonand observe the indicator light.

• If the indicator light stays on con-

stantly, programming is complete

and your device should activate whenthe HomeLink button is pressed andreleased.

• If the indicator light blinks rapidly for

two seconds and then turns to a con-

stant light continue with “Program-

ming” steps 4-6 to complete the pro-gramming of a rolling code equippeddevice (most commonly a garage dooropener).

4. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the “learn”or “smart” button. This can usually be

found where the hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unit.

5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or“smart” button. (The name and color of thebutton may vary by manufacturer.) Thereare 30 seconds to initiate step 6.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, holdfor two seconds and release the pro-grammed HomeLink button. Repeat the“press/hold/release” sequence a secondtime, and, depending on the brand of thegarage door opener (or other rolling codeequipped device), repeat this sequence athird time to complete the programmingprocess.

HomeLink should now activate your rollingcode equipped device.

Gate Operator/Canadian Programming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans-mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after sev-eral seconds of transmission – which may notbe long enough for HomeLink to pick up thesignal during programming. Similar to thisCanadian law, some U.S. gate operators aredesigned to “time-out” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having difficul-ties programming a gate operator or garagedoor opener by using the “Programming” pro-

cedures, replace “Programming HomeLink”

step 2 with the following:

• Continue to press and hold the HomeLinkbutton while you press and release -

every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the HomeLink indica-tor light changes from a slow to a rapidlyblinking light. Now you may release boththe HomeLink and hand-held transmitterbuttons.

Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to com-plete.

Using HomeLink

To operate, simply press and release the pro-grammed HomeLink button. Activation willnow occur for the trained device (i.e., garagedoor opener, gate operator, security system,entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). Forconvenience, the hand-held transmitter of thedevice may also be used at any time. In theevent that there are still programming difficul-ties or questions, contact HomeLink at:www.homelink.com.



02


Erasing HomeLink Buttons

To erase programming from the three Home-Link buttons (individual buttons cannot beerased but can be “reprogrammed” as outlinedbelow), follow the step noted:

1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLinkbuttons until the indicator light begins toflash-after 10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons. Do not hold forlonger that 20 seconds.

HomeLink is now in the train (or learning) modeand can be programmed at any time beginningwith “Programming” - step 1.

Reprogramming a Single HomeLinkButton

To program a device to HomeLink using aHomeLink button previously trained, followthese steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink but-ton. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. Without releasing the Home-Link button, proceed with “Programming”- step 1.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLinkat: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.

This device complies with FCC rules part 15and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operationis subject to the following two conditions: (1)This device may not cause harmful interfer-ence, and (2) This device must accept anyinterference that may be received includinginterference that may cause undesired opera-tion.

NOTE

The transmitter has been tested and com-plies with FCC and IC rules. Changes ormodifications not expressly approved bythe party responsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operate thedevice.2

2 The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

G020906

88

Climate control system – general information........................................ 90Air distribution......................................................................................... 92Electronic climate control (ECC)............................................................. 94

03CLIMATE

03 Climate

Climate control system – general information

03


Condensation on the inside of thewindows

Keeping the insides of the windows clean willhelp reduce the amount of condensation thatforms on the windows. Use a commercial win-dow cleaning agent to clean the windows.

Ice and snow

Always keep the air intake grille at the base ofthe windshield free of snow.

Cabin air filter

Replace the cabin air filter with a new one atthe recommended intervals. Please refer toyour Warranty and Service Records Informa-tion booklet, or consult a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician for these intervals.The filter should be replaced more often whendriving under dirty and dusty conditions. Thefilter cannot be cleaned and therefore shouldalways be replaced with a new one.

Sensors

The sunlight sensor on the dashboard and pas-senger compartment temperature sensor inthe ECC control panel should not be coveredin any way as this could cause incorrect infor-mation to be sent to the ECC system.

Parking the vehicle in warm weather

If your vehicle has been parked in the sun inwarm weather, opening the windows andmoonroof* for several minutes before drivingwill help release the warm air from the passen-ger compartment. When the engine is running,close the windows and moonroof and use therecirculation function for several minutes toenable the air conditioning to cool the com-partment as quickly as possible.

Windows and optional moonroof

The ECC system will function best if the win-dows and optional moonroof are closed. If youdrive with the moonroof open, we recommendthat you manually adjust the temperature andblower control (the LED in the AUTO switchshould be off).

Acceleration

The air conditioning is momentarily disen-gaged during full-throttle acceleration.

Climate control maintenance

Special tools and equipment are required tomaintain and carry out repairs on the climatesystem. Work of this type should only be doneby a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-nician.

Refrigerant

Volvo cares about the environment. The airconditioning system in your vehicle contains aCFC-free refrigerant – R134a (HFC134a). Thissubstance will not deplete the ozone layer. Theapproximate amount of R134a contained in thesystem is a follows:

6-cylinder engine

Single A/C system: 1.4 lbs (700 g)

Dual1 A/C system: 2.2 lbs (1000 g)

8-cylinder engine

Single A/C system: 1.5 lbs (700 g)

Dual1 A/C system: 2.3 lbs (1050 g)

The system also uses PAG oil.

1 Includes the optional rear A/C system

03 Climate

Climate control system – general information

03

91

Climate system blower

The climate system blower will be automati-cally switched off when the engine is not run-ning (even if the ignition key is in position I orII) to avoid unnecessary battery drain. To acti-vate the blower, turn the control to the desiredsetting.

The climate system blower may start automat-ically during a period of up to approximately50 minutes after the ignition has been turnedoff to remove condensation in the A/C evapo-rator. It will run for 15 minutes and switch offautomatically.

Passenger compartment blower

Approximately 50 minutes after the ignition isturned off, the blower may come on automati-cally, and run for seven minutes, to removecondensation in the A/C evaporator.

Blower function to reduce battery drain

The climate system's blower functions nor-mally while the engine is running.

However, when the engine is switched off(even if the ignition is switched to positions I orII), the blower control will be automaticallyswitched off to avoid unnecessary batterydrain.

The following points pertain if the ignition is onbut the engine in not running:

• To restart the blower, turn the control knobto the setting of your choice.

• After approximately 2 minutes, the blowerspeed will be reduced to avoid batterydrain.

You can reset the blower speed at any time.Please be aware that the system has beendesigned to reduce the blower's speed againafter 2 minutes, until the engine is started.

If the battery becomes drained:

• LOW BATTERY, FAN IS REDUCED willbe displayed in the text window in theinstrument panel.

• The yellow warning light in the instrumentpanel (see page 54) will also light up.

03 Climate

Air distribution

03

92

G027044

Air distribution

The incoming air is distributed through the ven-tilation points in the passenger compartmentshown above.

G027043

Air vents in the dash

Open

Closed

Horizontal air flow

Vertical air flow

Direct the outer air vents toward the side win-dows to defrost.

0

G027064

Air vents in the door pillars

Open

Closed

Horizontal air flow

Vertical air flow

Direct the outer air vents toward the side win-dows to defrost.

03 Climate

Air distribution

03


Ventilated front seats (XC90Executive*)

G030244

Controls for ventilated front seats

The ventilation system consists of fans in theseats and backrests that draw air through theseat upholstery. The cooling effect increasesas the air in the passenger compartmentbecomes cooler.

The level of ventilation is adjusted on the con-trol panel on the side of the seat. The fans canbe set to three speeds.

To start seat ventilation:

� Press briefly on .

To gradually increase ventilation:


For maximum ventilation:

� Hold down for approximately 2 sec-onds.

To gradually decrease ventilation:


To switch off ventilation:

� Hold down for approximately 2 sec-onds.

The ventilation can be used at the same timeas seat heating*, for example, to help dry dampclothing.

NOTE

• Seat ventilation cannot be started if thetemperature in the passenger compart-ment is below 41°F (5°C).

• Seat ventilation should be used withcaution by people who are sensitive todrafts. A moderate ventilation levelshould be set if the function is used forextended periods.

03 Climate

Electronic climate control (ECC)

03


Overview

AC – (ON/OFF)

Recirculation/Multifilter with sensor*

Recirculation

AUTO

Airdistribution

Passenger compartment temperature sen-sor

Defroster windshield and side windows

Rear window and door mirrors defroster

Heated front seats*

Temperature passenger´s side

Temperature driver´s side

Blower

Blower control for rear climate system*

Functions

A/C – ON/OFF

• The air conditioning functions only at tem-peratures above 32 °F (0 °C).

• While the Defroster function is selected,the air conditioning is temporarily activatedto dehumidify the air, even if you have man-ually switched the air conditioning off. This

will only function if the blower is notswitched off.

Press the switch to turn the air conditioning onor off. The "ON" or "OFF" LED will light up toindicate if the system is switched on or off.Other functions will still be regulated automat-ically (if the AUTO switch is on).

Interior air quality sensor*

Some vehicles are equipped with a multifilterand air quality sensor. The filter separatesgases and particles, thereby reducing theamounts of odors and contaminants enteringthe vehicle. The air quality sensor detectsincreased levels of contaminants in the outsideair. When the air quality sensor detects conta-

03 Climate


03

��

95

minated outside air, the air intake closes andthe air inside the passenger compartment isrecirculated, i.e. no outside air enters the vehi-cle. The filter also cleans recirculated passen-ger compartment air.

When the ECC system is in the AUTO mode,the green LED will be on.

Recirculation

Press this switch to engage the recirculationfunction (air in the passenger compartmentrecirculates – no fresh air enters the compart-ment). The LED in the switch will light up toindicate that the function is engaged.

• Use this function if the outside air is con-taminated with exhaust gases, smoke, etcor to heat/cool the vehicle quickly.

• Recirculation should not be used for morethan 15 minutes. If your windows begin tofog or mist, make sure that the recirculationfunction is switched off.

• Selecting Defroster automaticallyswitches recirculation off.

• Timer mode activation: (Vehicles equippedwith the Interior Air Quality system have notimer mode) Press and hold the recircula-tion button for at least 3 seconds to acti-vate a recirculation timer mode. The amberLED in the recirculation button will flash 5times to show that the timer mode is beingactivated. In timer mode, each time the

recirculation button is pressed, the climatecontrol system will recirculate the air in thepassenger compartment for5 – 12 minutes, depending on the outsideair temperature, and then revert back tofresh air.

• Timer mode deactivation: Press and holdthe recirculation button for 3 seconds. Theamber LED in the recirculation button willilluminate steadily for 5 seconds to show areturn to "normal" mode.

• In normal mode, when the recirculationbutton is pressed, the climate control sys-tem will recirculate the air in the passengercompartment until the recirculation buttonis pressed again.

• Timer mode memory: If the vehicle isturned off while timer mode is active, timermode will still be active when the vehicle isrestarted.

AUTO

This function automatically regulates the

Electronic Climate Control system so that

the selected temperatures are maintained.

The blower, heating, air distribution (air

flow), air conditioning, and optional air qual-

ity sensor are controlled. If you prefer to man-ually set any of these functions, the remainingfunctions will still be controlled automatically.Pressing the AUTO button overrides any set-tings that were previously made manually.

Air distribution

G027267

• Air flow to windows

• Air through panel vents

• Air through floor vents

Press AUTO to automatically regulate air flowor press any combination of the controlsshown in the illustration to manually adjust airflow. An LED in the switch will light up if an airflow control has been pressed.

Passenger compartment temperature

sensor

Measures the temperature in the compart-ment.

Defroster

This function defrosts/deices the windshieldand front side windows. The LED in the switch

03 Climate


03


will light up to indicate that the defrost functionis engaged.

• Blower speed increases automatically andthe air conditioning will switch on (if notalready on and if the passenger compart-ment blower is not turned off) to dehumid-ify the air in the passenger compartment.

• Recirculation will not function while defrostis engaged.

The climate system will return to its previoussettings when the defroster function isswitched off.

Rear window and door mirror

defrosters

This function defrosts/deices the rear windowand door mirrors. The LED in the switch willlight up to indicate that the heating function isengaged. For additional information on thisfunction see page 70.

Never use ice scrapers made of metal as theycan easily scratch the mirror surface.

Heated front seats*

1. Press the switch once for maximum seatheating. Both LEDs in the switch will be lit.

2. Press the switch a second time for comfortheating. One LED in the switch will be lit.

3. Press the switch a third time to turn theheating off completely. The LED will go off.

The seat heating for the passenger seat shouldbe switched off when the seat is not occupied.

Heated rear seats (XC90 Executive*)

G030976

Button for rear seat heating

Heating for the respective outboard rear seatscan be switched on or off with buttons on eitherside of the center console (see the illustration).

To switch on rear seat heating:

� Press the button.> The symbol in the button will illuminate.

To switch off rear seat heating:

� Press the button.> The symbol in the button will go out.

Temperature

These controls are used to individually set thetemperature for both sides of the passengercompartment. Please note that the compart-ment will not be heated or cooled faster by set-ting the temperature higher or lower than nec-essary.

Set the control to the temperature you prefer.

Blower control1

Turn the control clockwise to increase or coun-terclockwise to decrease the blower speed.Pressing the AUTO switch will automaticallyregulate blower speed and override manualadjustment.

Turning the blower control counterclockwiseuntil an orange LED comes on will turn both theblower and the air conditioning off.

Blower control for rear climate

system*

Turn the control to increase or decrease blowerspeed.

1 See also see page 90.

03 Climate


03

97

Operation

Press to operate the air quality sensor (normalsetting).

or:

Select one of the following three functions bypressing 1, 2 or 3 times.

1. The AUT LED lights. The air quality sensoris now activated.

2. No LED lights. Recirculation is not acti-vated unless needed to cool the passengercompartment in a warm climate.

3. The MAN LED lights. Recirculation is nowactivated.

Keep in mind the following:

• Make it a rule to have the air quality sensoractivated at all times.

• Recirculation is limited in cold climates toavoid fogging.

• If window fogging occurs, you shoulddeactivate the air quality sensor. Also usethe defroster functions for the windshield,side windows and rear window, seepage 94.

• The filter should be changed at the inter-vals recommended in the service sched-ule. However, if the vehicle is used in aseverely contaminated environment, it maybe necessary to change the filter more fre-quently.

G020908

98

Front seats............................................................................................ 100Rear seats............................................................................................. 104Interior lighting...................................................................................... 107Storage compartments......................................................................... 109Securing cargo...................................................................................... 114

04INTERIOR

04 Interior

Front seats

04


Manually adjusted front seats

G027214

Front-rear adjustment: lift the bar andmove the seat to the position of yourchoice.

Raise/lower the front edge of the seatcushion*: use the control to pump the frontedge of the cushion up or down.

Raise/lower seat height: pump the seat upor down.

Lumbar support: turn the control for firmeror softer lumbar support.

Backrest tilt: turn the control to adjust theangle of the backrest.

Control panel for optional power seat (seepage 100 for more information).

WARNING

• Do not adjust the seat while driving. Theseat should be adjusted so that thebrake pedal can be depressed fully. Inaddition, position the seat as far rear-ward as comfort and control allow.

• Check that the seat is securely lockedinto position after adjusting.

Folding the backrests in the front seat

G014805

The front passenger seat backrest can befolded to a horizontal position to make room fora long load. Fold the backrest as follows:

1. Move the seat as far back as possible.

2. Adjust the backrest to the upright position.

3. Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest.

4. Without releasing the catches, push thebackrest forward.

5. Move the seat as far forward as possibleso that the head restraint slides under theglove compartment.

WARNING

Cover sharp edges on the load to help pre-vent injury to occupants. Secure the load tohelp prevent shifting during sudden stops.

Power seat*

Operation

Driver's seat: The seat can be adjusted if theignition key is in position I, II or if the engine isrunning. It can also be adjusted as follows with

the ignition off:

04 Interior

Front seats

04

��

101

• Within several minutes after the driver'sdoor has been unlocked from the outside,has been opened, and remains open.

• Within a short period if the driver's door hasjust been closed.

• Within a short period if the driver's door hasnot been opened after the ignition hasbeen switched off.

Passenger seat: The seat can only beadjusted if the ignition key is in position I, II orif the engine is running.

G027036

Power seat adjustment controls

Seat adjustment

Adjust the power seat(s) with the two controlsat the side of the seat as follows:

Front edge of seat (raise/lower)

Forward – rearward

Rear edge of seat (raise/lower)

Backrest tilt

NOTE

The power seats have an overload protectorthat activates if a seat is blocked by anyobject. If this occurs, switch off the ignition(key in position 0 ) and wait for a short periodbefore operating the seat again.

Emergency stop

If the seat accidentally begins to move, pressany of the buttons to stop the seat.

NOTE

Please refer to the following page for infor-mation on programming the memory func-tion in the driver's seat.

Remote keyless entry system and the

driver's seat

The remote key transmitter also controls theposition of the electrically operated driver'sseat in the following way:

• Adjust the seat to your preferences.

• When you leave your vehicle, lock it usingthe remote key.

The position of the seat is now stored in theremote key.

Automatic seat adjustment

To move the seat to the position in which youleft it:

1. Unlock the driver's door with the sameremote key (the one used to lock the doors)

2. Open the driver's door within 2 minutes.

The driver's seat will automatically move to theposition in which you left it.

NOTE

• The seat will move to this position evenif someone else has moved it to a dif-ferent seating position and locked thevehicle with a different remote key.

• This feature will work in the same waywith all of the remote key transmitters(up to 3 ) that you use with your vehicle.

• This feature will not function if you lockyour vehicle with the key.

04 Interior

Front seats

04


WARNING

• Because the driver's seat can beadjusted with the ignition off, childrenshould never be left unattended in thevehicle.

• Movement of the seat can be STOPPEDat any time by pressing any button onthe power seat control panel.

• Do not adjust the seat while driving.

• The seat should be adjusted so that thebrake pedal can be depressed fully. Inaddition, position the seat as far rear-ward as comfort and control allow.

• The seat rails on the floor must not beobstructed in any way when the seat isin motion.

G027037

Programming the memory

Three different seating and door mirror posi-tions can be stored in the driver seat's memory.

The following example explains how button 1can be programmed. Buttons 2 and 3 can beprogrammed in the same way.

To program (store) a seat position in button 1:

1. Move the seat to the desired position usingthe seat adjustment controls (seepage 100).

2. Press and hold down the MEM (memory)button.

3. With the MEM button depressed, pressbutton 1 briefly to store the seat's currentposition.

To move the seat to the position that it was inwhen button 1 was programmed:

Press and hold down button 1 until the seatstops moving.

As a safety precaution, the seat will stop auto-matically if the button is released before theseat has reached the preset position.

Front seats - XC90 Executive*

G030180

Massage

Lumbar support

04 Interior

Front seats

04

103

Massage

G030183

Massage control

Firm massage

Gentle massage

Each front seat has a massage function in itsbackrest. The massage action is done with aircushions, which can be adjusted to a firm orgentle setting. When the setting has beenmade, the massaging action is carried out incycles as follows: massage 6 minutes – pause4 minutes – massage 6 minutes, etc.

When the button is in the center position or ifthe ignition is in position 0, the massage func-tion is switched off.

Lumbar support

G030229

Lumbar support control

The lumbar support uses the same air cushionsas the massage function. The button can beused to adjust the amount of support in fourdirections, as shown in the illustration.

Lumbar support can be only be adjusted whenthe massage function is switched off.

A memory function stores the lumbar supportsetting and this support will resume after themassage function has been switched off orafter the vehicle has been parked for anextended period of time.

04 Interior

Rear seats

04

104

Entering the optional third row of seats

G027027

Tilting the outboard backrests in the

second row of seats:

• Pull up the handle (1), hold it up, and tilt thebackrest forward to move the seat.

• Return the backrest to the upright positionto slide the seat back to its original posi-tion.

Forward/rearward seat adjustment

Lift the adjustment bar (2) to move the seat for-ward or rearward.

Removing the center console (seven-

seat models only)1

G028445

In order to make it possible to move the centerseat in the second row of seats as far forwardas possible (seven-seat models only), the rearsection of the center console can be removed.

• Pull the handle (see illustration above) andlift out the console.

• To return the console to its original posi-tion, slide it back into position until it clicksinto place.

G027033

Sliding center seat – second row (seven-

seat models only)

The center seat in the second row can bemoved farther forward than the outboardseats. This makes it possible for a child seatedin this position to sit closer to the people in thefront seats.

1 The center console cannot be removed on vehicles equipped with the optional Rear Seat Entertainment System.

04 Interior

Rear seats

04

��

105

G027015

Head restraint – second row, center

position

The head restraint in the center position can beadjusted to 4 different heights.

To raise – pull the restraint up until it clicks intoone of the four heights positions.

To lower – press the button at the base of thesupport (see illustration above) and press thehead restraint down.

WARNING

The center rear seat head restraint shouldonly be in its lowest position when this seatis NOT occupied. When the center positionis occupied, the head restraint should becorrectly adjusted to the passenger’sheight. The upper edge of the head restraintshould be at least on a level with the upper-most point of the seat occupant's ear.

G027022

Folding the backrests – second row of

seats

1. Move the seat(s) to their rearmost position(seven-seat models only).

2. Pull the loop to fold down an outboardhead restraint. Press down the center headrestraint if necessary (see page 105).

3. Pull the handle (1) outward to release thebackrest. The backrests are designed tolock at a 45 degree angle. Pull the handleagain to continue pressing it down until itlocks in the horizontal position.

To return the backrests to the upright position,pull handle B and pull the backrest up.

04 Interior

Rear seats

04


G027016

Folding the backrests – third row of

seats*

Folding down the backrest

If necessary, fold in the load anchorage eyeletsbefore folding down the backrests.

1. Move the seats in the second row as farforward as possible, see page 104.

2. Pull up the handle, illustration 1 above.

3. Push the seat cushion firmly rearward,under the backrest.

4. Fold down the backrests2 (the headrestraints fold down automatically) to thehorizontal position.

Returning the backrest to the upright

position

1. Fold up the backrest to the upright posi-tion.

2. Grasp the strap (see illustration 3 above)and pull the seat cushion out until it locksin place. This also locks the backrest in theupright position.

2 Please note that the head restraints in this row cannot be vertically adjusted.

04 Interior

Interior lighting

04

��

107

Reading lights and courtesy light

G026960

Driver's side front reading lamp

Courtesy lights

Passenger's side front reading lamp Thereading lights can be switched on or off bypressing buttons 1 or 3. The courtesy light-ing (including footwell lighting) can beturned on or off by pressing button 2. Thisalso activates the automatic function.

G027153

Rear reading lights

Driver's side rear reading light

Passenger's side rear reading light Therear reading lights can be switched on andoff by pressing buttons (4) or (5).

Automatic function

The reading lights and courtesy lights willswitch off automatically approximately10 minutes after the engine has been turnedoff. The lights can be turned off sooner bypressing the respective buttons.

The courtesy lights come on automatically1

and remain on for approximately 30 secondswhen:

• The vehicle has been unlocked from theoutside with the remote key or key

• If the engine has been switched off and theignition key has been turned to position 0

The courtesy lights will come on and remain onfor approximately 10 minutes when:

• One of the doors is opened (assuming thecourtesy lighting has not previously beenswitched off)

The courtesy lighting will go off when:

• The engine is started

• The vehicle is locked from the outside withthe remote key or key blade.

The automatic function can be disconnectedby pressing button (2) for more than 3 seconds.

Briefly pressing the button again automaticallyreconnects the function.

The courtesy light timer periods can bechanged. Contact a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician.

1 This function is light dependent and is only activated in dark conditions.

04 Interior

Interior lighting

04

108

Vanity mirror

G027045

The light comes on when you open the cover.

Glove compartment lighting

The light in the glove compartment comes onor switches off when its door is opened orclosed.

04 Interior

Storage compartments

04

��

109

G03

3089

04 Interior


04

110

Storage compartment in optional third rowof seats

Storage compartment

Glove compartment

Storage compartment in center console

Rear seat cup holders

Storage pocket (also in front edge of frontseats)

Grocery bag holder

WARNING

Make sure that no hard, sharp or heavyobjects lie on or in any of the storage areaswhere they might cause injury during sud-den braking.

Storage compartment in the centerconsole

G027019

To open the lid on the storage compartment,press the lower edge of the opening latch (seeillustration above). This lid can be folded backto form a small table area for rear seat passen-gers.

Lift the tray under the lid to expose the deepstorage bin with slots for CD storage.

G027020

Cup holders for the front seats

Two cup holders are provided for the front seatoccupants. Press lightly on the rear edge of thecover to open it.

Ashtray (accessory)

An ashtray insert is available from your Volvoretailer. This insert slides into either of the cupholders.

Pen holder

There is a pen holder in the center console, infront of the gear selector.

04 Interior


04

��

111

G027018

Storage compartment in rear side of the

center console

Grasp the upper edge of cover and pull to openthis compartment.

Ashtray (accessory)

An ashtray insert is available from your Volvoretailer.

G027063

Cup holders for the rear seats

• Grasp the lower edge of the panel to pullout the cup holders in the rear side of thecenter console.

• The cup holder insert can be removed toprovide space for a large plastic bottle. Pullthe insert straight up to remove it. Pressdown to reinsert it.

ATTENTIONPakjdskdl ioiuip kjöpp opoodidåuswi

C

SOUND

MENU

80

ENTER

LSE E

EXIT

MY KEYRTO

AIRBAG

G027025

Glove compartment

The glove compartment can be used to storethings such as the owner's manual, maps,pens, etc.

04 Interior


04


G027028

Coat hanger

The jacket hanger is located on the inboardside of the front passenger's seat headrestraint. It is only intended for hanging lightgarments.

G027026

Storage space between rear seats

(seven-seat models)*

This storage space provides compartments forpens or other small items.

G027040

Rear side storage compartments and

cup holders (seven-seat models)

Lift the lid to access the storage compartment.

04 Interior


04


Refrigerator* (XC90 Executive)

G027068

The refrigerator is located under the cover inthe front seat center armrest. Use the button(see the inset illustration) to adjust the level ofcooling.

The refrigerator functions when the engine isrunning or when the ignition is in position II.

WARNING

Bottles kept in the refrigerator should befirmly sealed and the cover over the refrig-erator must be securely closed while thevehicle is in motion.

04 Interior

Securing cargo

04

114

G027031

As a safety precaution, all cargo in your vehicleshould be securely anchored to keep it frombeing thrown forward in the event of suddenbraking, etc. The vehicle is equipped with eye-lets in the cargo space to which straps or othercargo restraints can be attached.

WARNING

The eyelets are not to be used as passengerrestraints or as anchorages for childrestraints.

Consult your Volvo retailer about suitableaccessories for this purpose.

Remember that an object weighing 44 lbs

(20 kg) produces a force of 2,200 lbs

(1,000 kg) in a head-on collision at 30 mph

(50 km/h)!

Keep the following in mind when loading the

vehicle:

• The load carrying capacity of your vehicleis determined by factors such as the num-ber of passengers, the amount of cargo,the weight of any accessories that may beinstalled, etc. See the section "Vehicleloading" in the chapter "Wheel and tires"for more detailed information.

• Load the cargo against the backrest.

• Load heavy cargo as low as possible.

• If no one is sitting in the outboard rearseat(s), reinforce the backrest by fasteningthe seat belts.

• Never load cargo above the backrest with-out a cargo net.

WARNING

When the rear backrest(s) are folded down,the vehicle should not be loaded to a levelhigher than 2 in. (5 cm) below the upperedge of the rear side windows. Objectsplaced higher than this level could impedethe function of the inflatable curtain.

G027058

Attachment bracket

Nylon cargo net (accessory)

The Volvo XC90 can be equipped with a cargonet made of strong nylon fabric.

This net can be installed in two places:

• Behind the rear seat backrests (the secondrow of seats in seven-seat models)

• Behind the front seat backrests if the rearseat backrests (the second row of seats inseven-seat models) have been foldeddown.

04 Interior

Securing cargo

04

��

115

Attachment eyelet in front seat rail

If the vehicle is equipped with the cargo areacover, lift the cover out of the vehicle beforeinstalling the cargo net.

1. The upper and lower rods of the cargo netare hinged. Position the rods so that theyare straight and lock in position.

2. Insert the end of the upper rod in one of theattachment brackets (see illustration in theleft column).

3. Insert the other end of the rod in the attach-ment bracket on the opposite side of thevehicle.

NOTE

On seven-seat models: When using the netin the rear attachment brackets, be sure it isinstalled in front of the side armrests.

4. Attach the lower straps to the eyelets onthe floor if the net has been installed in therear attachment brackets. Use the eyeletsin the front seat rails if the net has beeninstalled in the forward attachment brack-ets.

5. Adjust the straps to pull the net taut.

Folding and storing the cargo net

Press the release buttons on the hinges (1 inthe illustration) and fold the net.

The cargo net can be stored under the floor ofthe cargo area on five-seat models.

WARNING

• Be sure the cargo net is properlyinserted in the attachment brackets andthe straps are correctly attached to theeyelets and pulled taut.

• Do not use the net if it is damaged in anyway.

• When it is not in use, store the net sothat it cannot be thrown forward in theevent of sudden braking, etc.

G027056

Upper attachments

04 Interior

Securing cargo

04

116

Steel grid (accessory)

Installing the grid, upper attachments

1. Lift in the grid through the tailgate orthrough one of the rear passenger doors (inthis case, fold down the rear seat backr-ests/backrests in second row of seats inseven-seat models).

2. Insert one of the grid's upper attachmentsinto an attachment bracket above one ofthe rear passenger doors (see illustrationabove).

3. Push the grid's attachment into the forwardposition in the attachment bracket (seeinset illustration above) to lock the attach-ment in place.

G027057

Lower attachments

4. Insert the grid's other upper attachment inthe attachment bracket above the oppo-site rear passenger door, and press theattachment into the forward position in theattachment bracket to lock it in place.

Installing the grid, lower attachments

1. Insert the lower attachment bracketthrough the steel grid's lower mount fromunderneath.

2. Install the spring on the attachmentbracket and tighten the knob.

3. Secure the attachment bracket hook in thelower cargo eyelet. Turn the knob to ten-

sion the attachment bracket in the cargoeyelet.

4. Repeat the operation on the opposite side.

5. Tighten both attachment brackets alterna-tively.

6. Place the protective caps on the threadsabove the knobs.

WARNING

Seven-seat models:

• The backrests of the optional third rowseats must be folded down when instal-ling the steel grid.

• The steel grid is installed behind thesecond row of seats in seven-seat mod-els. To avoid the risk of injury, no oneshould be allowed to sit in the third rowof seats when the steel grid is in placein the vehicle.

04 Interior

Securing cargo

04


G027055

Cargo area cover*

Installing the cargo area cover:

1. Press the end pieces of the cargo areacover down in the holders.

2. Pull out the cargo area cover and hook it inthe holes in the rear cargo area pillars (seeillustration above).

Removing the cargo area cover:

1. Press the end pieces of the cover inward.

2. Pull up and lift out.

G027066

Grocery bag holder

1. Fold down the lower section of the tailgate.

2. Fold up the rear section of the cargo com-partment floor.

3. Hang or secure your grocery bags bymeans of the straps or holders.

118

Remote keys and key blades................................................................ 120Locking and unlocking.......................................................................... 124Child safety locks.................................................................................. 126Alarm..................................................................................................... 127

05LOCKS AND ALARM

05 Locks and alarm

Remote keys and key blades

05

120

Key blades

G030177

Your vehicle is equipped with two codedremote key transmitters with integrated ignitionkey blades called Key Integrated Remote (KIR).

To unlock/lock the vehicle using the key blade:

• Insert the key blade in the driver's door lockand turn it once to unlock the driver's door

only.

• Turn the key blade again (within 10 sec-onds) to unlock all doors and the tailgate.

• Turn the key blade once in the oppositedirection to lock all doors and the tailgate.

Use the switch on the driver's door armrest tolock/unlock the vehicle from the inside.

WARNING

If the doors are locked while driving, thismay hinder rapid access to the occupantsof the vehicle in the event of an accident.(Also see information on "Child safetylocks".)

NOTE

To help prevent accidentally locking thekeys in the vehicle, the central locking sys-tem is designed to unlock the doors imme-diately if the key is left in the ignition switch,the vehicle is locked using the lock buttonon the door and the door is then closed. Asound from the lock will be audible at thistime.

Please note that this function will not unlockthe doors if the engine is running.

Immobilizer (start inhibitor)

Each of the keys supplied with your vehiclecontains a coded transmitter. The code in thekey is transmitted to an antenna in the ignitionswitch where it is compared to the code storedin the start inhibitor module. The vehicle willstart only with a properly coded key.

Each key has a unique code, which your Volvoretailer uses if new keys are required. A maxi-mum of six remote keys can be programmedand used for one vehicle.

If you misplace a key, take the other keys to anauthorized Volvo retailer for reprogramming asan antitheft measure.

If two of the keys to your vehicle are closetogether, e.g., on the same key ring, when youtry to start the vehicle, this could cause inter-ference in the immobilizer system and result inthe vehicle not starting. If this should occur,remove one of the keys from the key ring beforetrying to start the vehicle again.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing condition: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

05 Locks and alarm


05

��

121

Remote keys

G026963

Your vehicle is equipped with two codedremote key transmitters with integrated ignitionkeys called Key Integrated Remote (KIR).

The remote key transmitters will also activateor allow "keyless" entry into the passengercompartment or the tailgate. These transmit-ters use a radio frequency that will enable youto lock/unlock all doors and the tailgate from adistance of 10 – 15 feet (3 – 5 meters). They willalso activate or deactivate your vehicle's alarmsystem(s). The vehicle can also be locked/unlocked with the key.

If one of the transmitters is misplaced, areplacement can be purchased from your near-est authorized Volvo retailer for replacement.

G027013

Unlock

Unlock tailgate

"Panic" function

Approach lighting

Lock

Fold key blade in/out

Using the remote key

Unlock

Press this button once to unlock the driver'sdoor only. Wait for at least 1 second and pressthe button again (within 10 seconds) to unlockall doors, and the tailgate.

Tailgate unlock

Press this button to unlock the tailgate (withoutunlocking the other doors). This function willnot open the tailgate.

Panic function

For more information on this function, seepage 127.

Approach lighting

Press this button when approaching the vehi-cle at night to light up the interior courtesy light,parking lights, license plate lights and the lightsin the door mirrors.

Lock

Press once to lock all doors, and the tailgate.

Fold key blade in/out

Press to extend the key blade. This buttonmust also be pressed when the key blade isfolded back into the slot in the side of theremote key unit.

05 Locks and alarm


05

122

NOTE

• If an airbag deploys, your vehicle's SRScontrol module will attempt to automat-ically unlock all doors.

• The key blade may also be used to lockand unlock the doors, and to activateand deactivate the alarm system.

• To avoid leaving your keys in the vehi-cle, make a habit of always locking thevehicle with the remote key.

• If the key blade section of the remote isnot fully folded out when starting thevehicle, the immobilizer function maymake it impossible to start the engine.

• The vehicle can be locked even if a dooris open. When the door(s) are closed,they will be locked. Please be awarethat the keys could be locked in the carwhen this is done.

Automatic re-locking

If the doors are unlocked, the locks will auto-matically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm willrearm after 2 minutes unless a door or the tail-gate has been opened. This helps prevent thecar from inadvertently being left unlocked.

FCC ID: LQNP2T-APU

This device complies with part 15 of the FCCrules. Operation is subject to the following con-

ditions: (1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired operation.

Canadian 2306104388

Model 504 2927 by Donnelly

Operation is subject to the following condi-tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter-ference, including interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Canadian 2306104388A

Model 509 977 by Connaught Electronics

Operation is subject to the following condi-tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter-ference, including interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

WARNING

Never use the transmitter to lock the doorsfrom inside the vehicle.

• Doing so would ACTIVATE:

• the break-in alarm, which would soundif one of the doors were opened

• the optional interior motion and inclina-tion alarm sensors.

• Doing so would DEACTIVATE:

• the moonroof and interior courtesy lightcontrols.

• the central locking buttons on the frontdoor armrests, although the interiordoor handles would still function toallow occupants to leave the vehicle.

• Disabled features would remain disa-bled until the remote is used again tounlock the vehicle.

• In addition, locking an occupied vehiclewould hinder rapid access to the occu-pants in an accident or emergency.

05 Locks and alarm


05

123

Replacing the battery in the remote key

If the range of the transmitter is noticeablyreduced, this indicates that the battery is weakand should be replaced.

To replace the battery:

1. Carefully pry open the rear edge of thecover with a small screwdriver.

2. Insert a new 3-volt, CR2032 battery, withthe battery's plus side up. Avoid touchingthe contact surfaces of the battery withyour fingers.

3. Press the cover back into place. Ensurethat the rubber seal is correctly positionedto help keep out moisture.

NOTE

The old battery should be disposed of prop-erly at a recycling center or at your Volvoretailer.

05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

05

124

G029646

Locking and unlocking the vehicle from

the inside

The switch on the driver's door armrest can beused to lock or unlock all doors and the tail-gate, and to set the alarm.

Each door can also be locked with the lockbutton on the respective door and opened bypulling the door handle on the door.

Automatic locking

The function locks the doors automaticallywhen the vehicle's speed exceeds approxi-mately 5 mph (7 km/h). The doors will thenremain locked until a door in opened from theinside or if all of the doors are unlocked fromthe control panel in the driver's door.

This function can be activated/deactivatedfrom the control panel in the driver's door.

Activating/deactivating automatic

locking

1. Turn the ignition key to position I or II.

2. Press the READ button on the left-sidesteering wheel lever to erase any mes-sages that may be displayed in the infor-mation display.

3. Depress the central locking button on thecontrol panel until a new message aboutthe locking status is displayed.

The message AUTOLOCK ON (the doors willbe locked when the vehicle begins to move) orAUTOLOCK OFF will be displayed.

ATTENTIONPakjdskdl ioiuip kjöpp opoodidåuswi

C

SOUND

MENU

80

ENTER

LSE E

EXIT

MY KEYRTO

AIRBAG

G027025

Locking the glove compartment

The glove compartment can be locked with themaster key.

G028485

Unlocking the tailgate

The tailgate lock is incorporated in the centrallocking system and is locked or unlocked whenall doors are locked/unlocked.

The tailgate can be unlocked by:

• Pressing UNLOCK on the remote keytwice.

• Using the central locking button on thedriver's door.

05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

05

125

• Pressing the remote key's tailgate unlockbutton (see the illustration).

• Relock the tailgate using the remote'sLOCK button.

Automatic relocking

If you use the tailgate unlock button to unlockthe tailgate without opening it, it will automati-cally relock after approximately 2 minutes.

NOTE

If you open the tailgate and close it again, itwill remain unlocked and the alarm will notbe rearmed. Press the lock button on theremote key to relock the tailgate and rearmthe alarm.

05 Locks and alarm

Child safety locks

05


G021513

Child safety locks in the rear doors

Manual child safety locks – rear doors/

tailgate

The controls are located on the rear door jambsand at the lower edge of the tailgate. Use a keyor small screwdriver to adjust these controls.

The door/tailgate cannot be openedfrom the inside. The door/tailgate can beopened from the outside.

The door/tailgate locks function nor-mally.

G021512

Child safety lock in the tailgate

WARNING

Remember, in the event of an accident, therear seat passengers cannot open the doorsfrom the inside with the buttons in positionA.

REARAC

G027105

Power child locks*

To prevent the rear doors from being openedfrom the inside:

1. Turn the vehicle's ignition key to at leastposition 1.

2. Press the button shown above.

Indicator light in the button ON: the doorscannot be opened from the inside. Normaloperation from the outside.

Indicator light in the button OFF: the doorscan be opened from the inside.

05 Locks and alarm

Alarm

05

127

The alarm is automatically armed wheneveryou lock your vehicle.

When armed, the alarm continuously monitorsa number of points on the vehicle. The follow-ing conditions will set off the alarm:

• The hood is forced open.

• The tailgate is forced open.

• A door is forced open.

• The ignition switch is tampered with.

• If there is movement in the passenger com-partment (if the vehicle is equipped withthe optional movement sensor).

• The vehicle is lifted or towed (if the vehicleis equipped with the optional inclinationsensor).

• The battery is disconnected (while thealarm is armed).

• The siren is disconnected when the alarmis disarmed.

Arming the alarm

1. Press the LOCK button on the remote key.

2. Lock the vehicle using the key blade in thedriver's door or press the central lock but-ton on the driver's door with the door open.

One long flash of the turn signals will confirmthat the alarm is armed.

Disarming the alarm

Press the UNLOCK button on the remote keyor unlock the doors with the key blade.

Turning off (stopping) the alarm

If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped bypressing the UNLOCK button on the remotekey or by unlocking the driver's door with thekey blade.

Visual alarm signal

The visual alarm signal is given by flashing allturn signals and turning on the interior lightingfor approximately 5 minutes.

Audible alarm signal

An audible alarm signal is given by a batterypowered siren. One alarm cycle lasts for25 seconds.

"Panic" button

In an emergency situation, this feature can beused to attract attention.

Activate the "panic" button by pressing the redbutton on the remote key ( see page 121 forillustration) for at least 3 seconds or by press-ing this button twice within 3 seconds. The turnsignals will flash, and the vehicle's horn willsound.

The function can be turned off by pressing anyof the buttons on the remote key or will stop

automatically after 25 seconds. When a buttonis pressed, there is a 5 second delay before thepanic alarm is deactivated.

NOTE

This button will NOT unlock the vehicle.

LED alarm status signals

The status of the alarm system is indicated bythe red LED at the top of the dash:

• LED off – the alarm is not armed

• LED flashes once per second – the alarmis armed

• LED flashes rapidly before the ignition isswitched on – the alarm has been triggered

• Fault in the alarm system: If a fault hasbeen detected in the alarm system, a mes-sage will be displayed in the text window.Contact a trained and qualified Volvo serv-ice technician.

Automatic re-lock/re-arm system

If the vehicle is unlocked with the remote, thevehicle will re-lock and the alarm will re-armafter 2 minutes unless a door or the tailgate hasbeen opened.

G020912


General information............................................................................... 130Fuel requirements................................................................................. 131Refueling............................................................................................... 133Starting the vehicle............................................................................... 135Ignition switch and steering wheel lock................................................ 137Economical driving................................................................................ 138Difficult driving conditions..................................................................... 139Automatic transmission........................................................................ 140Jump starting........................................................................................ 143All Wheel Drive*..................................................................................... 144Brake system........................................................................................ 145Stability system..................................................................................... 147Front/rear park assist*........................................................................... 149Towing.................................................................................................. 151Towing a trailer...................................................................................... 153Detachable trailer hitch......................................................................... 156Load carriers (accessory)...................................................................... 157Cold weather precautions..................................................................... 158Before a long distance trip.................................................................... 159Blind Spot Information System............................................................. 160

06STARTING AND DRIVING


General information

06

130

Engine oil

Although some oil consumption occurs duringnormal engine operation, more oil is consumedwhen the engine is new as the internal partsgenerate higher friction while wearing-in toeach other. From the time the engine is newuntil the first maintenance is performed, the oilconsumption could be higher than normal. Forthis reason, it is especially important to checkthe oil every time you refuel your vehicle duringthis period, see page 209.

Fuel requirements

Deposit control gasoline (detergent

additives)

Volvo recommends the use of detergent gas-oline to control engine deposits. Detergentgasoline is effective in keeping injectors andintake valves clean. Consistent use of depositcontrol gasolines will help ensure good driva-bility and fuel economy. If you are not surewhether the gasoline contains deposit controladditives, check with the service station oper-ator.

NOTE

Volvo does not recommend the use of exter-nal fuel injector cleaning systems.

Unleaded fuel

Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic converterand must use only unleaded gasoline. U.S. andCanadian regulations require that pumps deliv-ering unleaded gasoline be labelled "UNLEA-DED". Only these pumps have nozzles whichfit your vehicle's filler inlet. It is unlawful to dis-pense leaded fuel into a vehicle labelled"unleaded gasoline only". Leaded gasolinedamages the three-way catalytic converter andthe heated oxygen sensor system. Repeateduse of leaded gasoline will lessen the effective-ness of the emission control system and couldresult in loss of emission warranty coverage.State and local vehicle inspection programswill make detection of misfueling easier, pos-sibly resulting in emission test failure for mis-fueled vehicles.

NOTE

Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines containan octane enhancing additive called methyl-cyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). If such fuels are used, your EmissionControl System performance may be affec-ted, and the Check Engine Light (malfunc-tion indicator lamp) located on your instru-ment panel may light. If this occurs, pleasereturn your vehicle to a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician for maintenance.

Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers

"Oxygenated fuels"

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing"oxygenates" which are usually alcohols orethers. In some areas, state or local lawsrequire that the service pump be marked indi-cating use of alcohols or ethers. However,there are areas in which the pumps areunmarked. If you are not sure whether there isalcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy, checkwith the service station operator. To meet sea-sonal air quality standards, some areas requirethe use of "oxygenated" fuel.

Volvo allows the use of the following "oxygen-ated" fuels; however, the octane ratings listedon page 131 must still be met.

Alcohol – Ethanol: Fuels containing up to 10%ethanol by volume may be used. Ethanol mayalso be referred to as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gaso-hol".

Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to 15%MTBE may be used.


Fuel requirements

06

��

131

Octane rating

Minimum octane

G02

8920

Typical pump octane label

Volvo recommends premium for best perform-ance, but using 87 octane or above will notaffect engine reliability.

Volvo engines are designed to achieve ratedhorsepower, torque, and fuel economy per-formance using premium 91 octane fuel.

Demanding driving

In demanding driving conditions, such as oper-ating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a trailer,or driving for extended periods at higher alti-tudes than normal, it may be advisable toswitch to higher octane fuel (91 or higher) or tochange gasoline brands to fully utilize your

engine's capacity, and for the smoothest pos-sible operation.

NOTE

When switching to higher octane fuel orchanging gasoline brands, it may be neces-sary to fill the tank more than once before adifference in engine operation is noticeable.

Fuel Formulations

Do not use gasoline that contains lead as aknock inhibitor, and do not use lead additives.Besides damaging the exhaust emission con-trol systems on your vehicle, lead has beenstrongly linked to certain forms of cancer.

Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent.Unburned benzene has been strongly linked tocertain forms of cancer. If you live in an areawhere you must fill your own gas tank, takeprecautions. These may include:

• standing upwind away from the filler nozzlewhile refueling

• refueling only at gas stations with vaporrecovery systems that fully seal the mouthof the filler neck during refueling

• wearing neoprene gloves while handling afuel filler nozzle.

Use of Additives

With the exception of gas line antifreeze duringwinter months, do not add solvents, thicken-ers, or other store-bought additives to yourvehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems.Overuse may damage your engine, and someof these additives contain organically volatilechemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourselfto these chemicals.

WARNING

Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless,and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaustgases. If you ever smell exhaust fumesinside the vehicle, make sure the passengercompartment is ventilated, and immediatelyreturn the vehicle to a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician for correction.


Fuel requirements

06

132

WARNING

Driving with the tailgate open: Driving withthe tailgate open could lead to poisonousexhaust gases entering the passenger com-partment.

• If the tailgate must be kept open for anyreason, proceed as follows:

• Close the windows

• Set the ventilation system control to airflow to floor, windshield and side win-dows and blower control to its highestsetting.

Weight distribution affects handling

At the specified curb weight your vehicle has atendency to understeer, which means that thesteering wheel has to be turned more thanmight seem appropriate for the curvature of abend.

This ensures good stability and reduces therisk of rear wheel skid. Remember that theseproperties can alter with the vehicle load.

The heavier the load in the cargo area, the lessthe tendency to understeer.

Handling, roadholding

Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pressureall affect vehicle handling. Therefore, checkthat the tires are inflated to the recommended

pressure according to the vehicle load. See"Tire pressure" section.

Loads should be distributed so that capacityweight or maximum permissible axle loads arenot exceeded.

Conserving electrical current

Keep the following in mind to help minimizebattery drain:

• When the engine is not running, avoid turn-ing the ignition key to position II (seepage 137). Many electrical systems (theaudio system, the optional infotainment/navigation systems, power windows, etc)will function with the ignition key in positionI. This position reduces drain on the bat-tery.

• Please keep in mind that using systems,accessories, etc that consume a great dealof current when the engine is not runningcould result in the battery being completelydrained.

NOTE

A warning message will be displayed in thetext window in the instrument panel whenthe battery charge is low.


Refueling

06

��

133

Fuel filler door

G027073

The fuel filler cap can be placed on the hook onthe fuel filler door while refueling

Press the button on the light switch panel (seethe illustration on page 63) when the vehicle isat a standstill to unlock the fuel filler door.Please note that the fuel filler door will remainunlocked until the vehicle begins to move for-ward. An audible click will be heard when thefuel filler door relocks.

If you intend to leave your vehicle while it isbeing refueled, this feature enables you to lockthe doors/tailgate while leaving the fuel fillerdoor unlocked.

You can also keep the vehicle locked if youremain inside it during refueling. The centrallocking button does not lock the fuel filler door.Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstructed andis completely closed after refueling.

Open the fuel filler cap slowly during hot

weather.

NOTE

During a transitional period, a small numberof service stations may still have fuel noz-zles that are not compatible with the fuelfiller neck on vehicles equipped with theevaporative control system.

Refueling

The fuel tank is designed to accommodatepossible expansion of the fuel in hot weather.See page 270 for fuel tank volume. Be awarethat the "usable" tank capacity will be some-what less than the specified maximum. Whenthe fuel level is low, such factors as ambienttemperature, the fuel's "Reid vapor pressure"characteristics, and terrain can affect the fuelpump's ability to supply the engine with anadequate supply of fuel. Therefore, it is advis-able to refuel as soon as possible when the

needle nears the red zone, or when the fuelwarning light comes on.

WARNING

Never carry a cell phone that is switched onwhile refueling your vehicle. If the phonerings, this may cause a spark that couldignite gasoline fumes, resulting in fire andinjury.


Refueling

06

134

CAUTION

• Do not refuel with the engine running1.Turn the ignition off or to position I. If theignition is on, an incorrect reading couldoccur in the fuel gauge.

• After refueling, close the fuel filler capby turning it clockwise until it clicks intoplace1.

• Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do notpress the handle on the filler nozzlemore than one extra time. Too much fuelin the tank in hot weather conditions cancause the fuel to overflow. Overfillingcould also cause damage to the emis-sion control systems.

• Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling.In addition to causing damage to theenvironment, gasolines containingalcohol can cause damage to paintedsurfaces, which may not be coveredunder the New Vehicle Limited War-ranty.

• Do not use gasolines containing meth-anol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol).This practice can result in vehicle per-formance deterioration and can dam-age critical parts in the fuel system.Such damage may not be covered

under the New Vehicle Limited War-ranty.

1 If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle'sperformance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.


Starting the vehicle

06

��

135

Starting the engine

WARNING

Before starting, check that the seat, steeringwheel and mirrors are adjusted properly.Make sure the brake pedal can bedepressed completely. Adjust the seat ifnecessary, see page 100.

1. Fasten the seat belt.

2. Apply the parking brake (hand brake) if notalready set. The gear selector is locked inthe P position (SHIFTLOCK).

3. Without touching the accelerator pedal,turn the ignition key1 to the starting posi-tion. Allow the starter to operate for up to10 seconds. Release the key as soon asthe engine starts2. If the engine fails tostart, repeat this step.

NOTE

• If the key blade section of the remote isnot fully folded out when starting thevehicle, the immobilizer function maymake it impossible to start the engine.

• After a cold start, idle speed may benoticeably higher than normal for ashort period. This is done to help bringcomponents in the emission controlsystem to their normal operating tem-perature as quickly as possible, whichenables them to control emissions andhelp reduce the vehicle's impact on theenvironment.

• To release the gear selector from the P(Park) position, the engine must be run-ning (or the ignition key must be in posi-tion II) and the brake pedal must bedepressed.

• Select the desired gear. The gearengages after a very slight delay whichis especially noticeable when selectingR.

NOTE

Your vehicle is equipped with a KEYLOCKsystem. When the engine is switched off,the gear selector must be in the P positionbefore the key can be removed from theignition switch.

When starting in cold weather, the trans-mission may shift up at slightly higherengine speeds than normal until the auto-matic transmission fluid reaches normaloperating temperature.

NOTE

Do not race a cold engine immediately afterstarting. Oil flow may not reach some lubri-cation points fast enough to prevent enginedamage.

WARNING

An extra mat on the driver's floor can causethe accelerator pedal to catch. Check thatthe movement of the accelerator pedal isnot impeded. No more than one protectivefloor covering may be used at one time.

1 If two of the keys to your vehicle are close together, e.g. on the same key ring when you try to start the vehicle, this could cause interference in the immobilizer system and result in the vehicle notstarting. If this should occur, remove one of the keys from the key ring before trying to start the vehicle again.

2 On vehicles equipped with the autostart feature, release the key immediately. See also page 137.


Starting the vehicle

06

136

WARNING

Always place the gear selector in Park andapply the parking brake before leaving thevehicle. Never leave the vehicle unattendedwith the engine running.

• Always open garage doors fully beforestarting the engine inside a garage toensure adequate ventilation. Theexhaust gases contain carbon monox-ide, which is invisible and odorless butvery poisonous.

CAUTION

Automatic transmission

• The engine should be idling when youmove the gear selector. Never acceler-ate until after you feel the transmissionengage! Accelerating immediately afterselecting a gear will cause harshengagement and premature transmis-sion wear.

• Selecting P or N when idling at a stand-still for prolonged periods of time willhelp prevent overheating of the auto-matic transmission fluid.


Ignition switch and steering wheel lock

06

137

Ignition switch and steering wheel lock

0 – Locked position:

Remove the key to lockthe steering wheelA.

I – Intermediate posi-

tionB – "radio position":

Certain accessories,radio, etc. on, daytimerunning lights off.

II – Drive position: Thekey position when driv-ing. The vehicle's entireelectrical system is con-nected.

III – Start position:

Release the key when theengine starts. The keyreturns automatically tothe Drive position.

A chime will sound if the key is left in theignition and the driver's door is opened.

A The gear selector must be in the P (Park) position (automatictransmission).

B Please be aware that leaving the key in this position willincrease battery drain.

Autostart

This function makes it possible to start thevehicle without holding the key in the startposition (position III) until the engine starts.Turn the key to position III and release it. Thestarter motor will then operate automatically(for up to ten seconds) until the engine starts.

Steering wheel lock

The steering wheel lock might be under tensionwhen the vehicle is parked.

Turn the steering wheel slightly to free the igni-tion key.

In order to help reduce vehicle theft, make surethe steering wheel lock is engaged before leav-ing the vehicle.

WARNING

Never switch off the ignition (turn the ignitionkey to position 0) or remove the key from theignition switch while the vehicle is in motion.This could cause the steering wheel to lock,which would make the vehicle impossible tosteer.


Economical driving

06

138

Economical driving conserves naturalresources

Better driving economy may be obtained bythinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and stopsand adjusting the speed of your vehicle toimmediate traffic conditions. Observe the fol-lowing rules:

• Bring the engine to normal operating tem-perature as soon as possible by drivingwith a light foot on the accelerator pedal forthe first few minutes of operation. A coldengine uses more fuel and is subject toincreased wear.

• Whenever possible, avoid using the vehiclefor driving short distances. This does notallow the engine to reach normal operatingtemperature.

• Drive carefully and avoid rapid accelerationand hard braking.

• Use the transmission's D (Drive) positionas often as possible and avoid using "kick-down" to help improve fuel economy.

• Do not exceed posted speed limits.

• Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extraload) in the vehicle.

• Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tirepressure regularly (when tires are cold).

• Remove snow tires when threat of snow orice has ended.

• Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc,increase air resistance and also fuel con-sumption.

• At highway driving speeds, fuel consump-tion will be lower with the air conditioningon and the windows closed than with theair conditioning off and the windows open.

• Using the onboard trip computer's fuelconsumption modes can help you learnhow to drive more economically.

Other factors that decrease gas mileage

are:

• Dirty air cleaner

• Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter

• Dragging brakes

• Incorrect front end alignment.

Some of the above mentioned items and othersare checked at the standard MaintenanceService intervals.

CAUTION

Drive slowly and carefully if going throughstanding water (i.e. flooded roadways, etc.).Damage to the engine could result if excesswater is drawn in through the air intake sys-tem. Never drive the vehicle in water deeperthan 18 inches (48 cm).


Difficult driving conditions

06

139

Driving on rough/unpaved surfaces

The Volvo XC90 is designed primarily for on-road driving, and it has excellent handling cha-racteristics on very rough or unpaved roads.

When driving on poorly maintained or unpavedroads, please keep the following in mind:

• Reduce speed on rough surfaces to mini-mize possible damage to the vehicle'sunderbody.

• When driving on soft surfaces such as drysand or snow, try to avoid stopping if at allpossible.

WARNING

Avoid driving diagonally across steepinclines as this could increase the risk of aroll-over. Try to drive straight up or down theslope.

• If the road is very steep, avoid turningthe vehicle around to help avoid the riskof rolling over. Back the vehicle up ordown the incline instead.

NOTE

Avoid driving on steep inclines if the fueltank is nearly empty. If the flow of fuel to theengine is interrupted due to the vehicle'sangle of inclination, this could result in dam-age to the three-way catalytic converter. Werecommend keeping the fuel tank at leasthalf full when driving on steep inclines.

Driving through water

The vehicle can be driven through water up toa depth of approximately 16 inches (40 cm), ata maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h).

Take particular care when driving through flow-ing water.

Clean the electrical connections for trailer wir-ing after driving in mud or water.

When driving through water, maintain lowspeed and do not stop in the water.

WARNING

After driving through water, press lightly onthe brake pedal to ensure that the brakesare functioning normally. Water or mud canmake the brake linings slippery, resulting indelayed braking effect.

CAUTION

• Engine damage will occur if water isdrawn into the air cleaner.

• If the vehicle is driven through waterdeeper than 18 in (48 cm), water mayenter the differential and the transmis-sion. This reduces the oil's lubricatingcapacity and may shorten the servicelife of these components.

• Do not allow the vehicle to stand inwater up to the door sills longer thanabsolutely necessary. This could resultin electrical malfunctions.

• If the engine has been stopped while thecar is in water, do not attempt to restartthe engine. Have the car towed out ofthe water.



06

140

G026990

P (Park)

Use this position when starting the engine orparking the vehicle.

Never use P while the vehicle is in motion.

The parking brake should also be set wheneverthe vehicle is parked.

The gear selector is mechanically locked in

the P position (SHIFTLOCK). To release thegear selector from this position, the enginemust be running (or the ignition key must be inposition II) and the brake pedal must bedepressed.

N (Neutral)

Neutral – no gear engaged. Use the parkingbrake.

WARNING

Never leave the vehicle unattended whenthe engine is running. If, by mistake, the gearselector is moved from P, the vehicle maystart moving.

R (Reverse)

Never engage R while the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive)

D is the normal driving position and should beused as often as possible to help improve fueleconomy. The vehicle should not be movingwhen shifting from R to the D position.

NOTE

The transmission has 6 forward speeds.

Automatic transmission – shift gatepositions

G020237

Shift gate positions

Depress the button on the front of the gearselector knob to move between the R, N, D,

and P positions.

Kickdown

Automatic shift to a lower gear (kickdown) isachieved by depressing the accelerator pedalfully and briskly. An upshift will occur whenapproaching the top speed for a particular gearor by releasing the accelerator pedal slightly.

Kickdown can be used for maximum acceler-ation or when passing at highway speeds.



06

��

141

NOTE

The gear selector must be in the D (Drive)position for kickdown to function.

Manual shifting – Geartronic

You can move the gear selector freely betweenthe MAN (Manual) and D (Drive) positions toselect forward gears while driving. Gears 3, 4,5, and 6 have a "lock-up" function whichreduces engine speed and helps save fuel.

NOTE

Reverse, Neutral, and Park cannot beselected in Geartronic mode.

• A "lock-up" feature1 reduces engine speedand help saves fuel.

The currently selected gear will be displayed inthe instrument panel (see page 54).

• To access the MAN shifting position fromD, move the gear selector to the left toMAN.

• To return to the D positions from MAN,move the gear selector to the right.

While driving

If you select the MAN position while driving, thegear that was being used in the D position willalso initially be selected in MAN position.

• Move the gear selector forward(toward "+") to shift to a higher gear orrearward (toward "– ") to shift to a lowergear.

• If you hold the gear selector toward "–", thetransmission will downshift one gear andwill utilize the braking power of the engine.If the current speed is too high for using alower gear, the downshift will not occuruntil the speed has decreased enough toallow the lower gear to be used.

• If you slow down to a very low speed, thetransmission will automatically shift down.

• When starting in the MAN position, 3rdgear is the highest gear that may beselected.

W – Winter/Wet driving mode –enhanced vehicle traction

G030859

Press the W button at the base of the gearselector to engage/disengage this drivingmode (see illustration). The W symbol willappear in the display (see page 54) when thefunction is activated.

This mode may be selected for starting/movingoff on slippery roads. The vehicle starts off in3rd gear to help maintain traction. First andsecond gears will only be used during kick-down.

1 Six-speed transmission: gears 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6.



06

142

NOTE

Mode W can be chosen regardless of thepostion of the gear selector but will onlyfunction when the gear selector is in the D(drive) position.


Jump starting

06

143

G030860

Follow these instructions to jump start yourvehicle's dead battery or to jump start anothervehicle's dead battery using your vehicle.Although your vehicle's battery is locatedunder the floor of the cargo area, jumper cablesshould be connected in the engine compart-

ment, to the points shown in the illustrations.

If the 12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is inanother vehicle, check that the vehicles are nottouching to prevent premature completion of acircuit. Be sure to follow jump starting instruc-tions provided for the other vehicle.

To jump start your vehicle:

1. Switch off the ignition.

2. First connect the auxiliary battery positive(+) terminal (1) to the positive (+) terminal inyour vehicle's engine compartment (2),located under a small black plastic coverattached to the fuse box cover, markedwith a "+" sign. Remove the cover on themain fuse box if necessary to access thisterminal. Then connect the auxiliary bat-tery's negative (–) terminal (3) to the groundpoint in your vehicle's engine compartment(4).

3. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle,then start the engine in the vehicle withdead battery.

4. After the engine has started, first removethe negative (–) terminal jumper cable.Then remove the positive (+) terminaljumper cable.

WARNING

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!

Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-sories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the state of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm.Wash hands after handling.

WARNING

• Do not connect the jumper cable to anypart of the fuel system or to any movingparts. Avoid touching hot manifolds.

• Never expose the battery to open flameor electric spark.

• Do not smoke near the battery.

• Batteries generate hydrogen gas, whichis flammable and explosive.

• Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Donot allow battery fluid to contact eyes,skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If con-tact occurs, flush the affected areaimmediately with water. Obtain medicalhelp immediately if eyes are affected.

• Failure to follow the instructions forjump starting can lead to personalinjury.


All Wheel Drive*

06


All Wheel Drive (AWD) – generalinformation

Your Volvo can be equipped with an electron-ically controlled All Wheel Drive system*, whichmeans that power is distributed automaticallybetween the front and rear wheels. Under nor-mal driving conditions, most of the engine'spower is directed to the front wheels. However,if there is any tendency for the front wheels tospin, an electronically controlled coupling dis-tributes power to the wheels that have the besttraction.

Tire dimensions

Volvo recommends that you always drive ontires of the same brand, size, construction(radial), tread pattern, load-, speed-, traction-,temperature-, and treadwear rating. Neverdrive on mixed tires, except for brief periodswhen the temporary spare tire is in use.

Always use properly inflated tires of correctdimensions. Tire size and inflation pressuresare shown on the tire inflation pressure plac-ards, located on the driver's side B-pillar (thestructural member at the side of the vehicle, atthe rear of the driver's door opening), or on theinside of the fuel filler door on Canadian mod-els.

Temporary Spare

The temporary spare tire is for temporary, low-speed, short-distance use only. Replace it witha full-sized tire as soon as possible. Do notdrive on the temporary spare at speeds above50 m.p.h. (80 km/h).

NOTE

Never install snow chains on a temporaryspare.


Brake system

06

��

145

BRAKE Brake circuit malfunction

The brake system is a hydraulic system con-sisting of two master cylinders and two sepa-rate brake circuits. If a problem should occur inone of these circuits, it is still possible to stopthe vehicle with the other brake circuit.

If the brake pedal must be depressed fartherthan normal and requires greater foot pressure,the stopping distance will be longer.

A warning light in the instrument panel will lightup to warn the driver that a fault has occurred.

If this light comes on while driving or braking,stop immediately and check the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir.

NOTE

Press the brake pedal hard and maintainpressure on the pedal – do not pump thebrakes.

WARNING


NOTE

When the vehicle is at a standstill and theengine is idling, e.g. at a traffic light and thebrake pedal is depressed, the pedal may godown slightly. This is a normal function ofthe power-assisted brake system.

Power brakes function only when the

engine is running

The power brakes utilize vacuum pressurewhich is only created when the engine is run-ning. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with theengine switched off.

If the power brakes are not working, consider-ably higher pressure will be required on thebrake pedal to compensate for the lack ofpower assistance. This can happen for exam-ple when towing your vehicle or if the engine isswitched off when the vehicle is rolling. Thebrake pedal feels harder than usual.

Water on brake discs and brake pads

affects braking

Driving in rain and slush or passing through anautomatic car wash can cause water to collecton the brake discs and pads. This will cause adelay in braking effect when the pedal isdepressed. To avoid such a delay when thebrakes are needed, depress the pedal occa-sionally when driving through rain, slush etc.This will remove the water from the brakes.

Check that brake application feels normal. Thisshould also be done after washing or startingin very damp or cold weather.

Severe strain on the brake system

The brakes will be subject to severe strainwhen driving in mountains or hilly areas, orwhen towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usuallyslower, which means that the cooling of thebrakes is less efficient than when driving onlevel roads. To reduce the strain on the brakes,shift into a lower gear and let the engine helpwith the braking. Do not forget that, if you aretowing a trailer, the brakes will be subjected toa greater than normal load.

Anti-lock brakes (ABS)

If the warning lamp lights up thereis a malfunction of the ABS system(the standard braking system willhowever function) and the vehicleshould be driven cautiously to a

trained and qualified Volvo service technicianfor inspection. The Anti-lock Braking System(ABS) helps to improve vehicle control (stop-ping and steering) during severe braking con-ditions by limiting brake lockup. When the sys-tem "senses" impending lockup, braking pres-sure is automatically modulated in order to helpprevent lockup, which could lead to a skid.

The system performs a self-diagnostic test

when the engine is started and when the


Brake system

06

146

vehicle first reaches a speed of approxi-

mately 12 mph (20 km/h). The brake pedal willpulsate several times and a sound may beaudible from the ABS control module. This isnormal.

To obtain optimal effect from the ABS system,constant pressure should be kept on the brakepedal. Do not pump the brake pedal.

The switching of the ABS modulator will beaudible and the brake pedal will pulsate duringbraking. Please be aware that ABS does notincrease the absolute braking potential of thevehicle. While control will be enhanced, ABSwill not shorten stopping distances on slipperysurfaces.

ABS with EBD (Electronic Brake Force

Distribution)

EBD is an integrated part of the ABS system.EBD regulates the hydraulic pressure to therear brakes to help provide optimal brakingcapacity. The brake pedal will pulsate duringbraking, which is normal.

If the BRAKE and ABS warning lights come onat the same time, this could indicate a fault inthe brake system.

1. Stop the vehicle in a suitable place andswitch off the engine.

2. Restart the engine.

• If both warning lights go off, no furtheraction is required.

• If both lights are still on after the engine hasbeen restarted, switch off the engine againand check the brake fluid level (seepage 212 for the location of the brake fluidreservoir).

WARNING


• If the brake fluid level is above the MIN

mark, drive carefully to a trained and quali-fied Volvo service technician and have thebrake system inspected.

Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA)

The EBA function is designed to provide fullbrake effect immediately in the event of sud-den, hard braking. The system is activated bythe speed with which you depress the brakepedal.

NOTE

• When the EBA system is activated, thebrake pedal will go down and pressurein the brake system immediately increa-ses to the maximum level. You mustmaintain full pressure on the brakepedal in order to utilize the system com-pletely. There will be no braking effect ifthe pedal is released. EBA is automati-cally deactivated when the brake pedalis released.

• When the vehicle has been parked forsome time, the brake pedal may sinkmore than usual when the engine isstarted. This is normal and the pedal willreturn to its usual position when it isreleased.


Stability system

06

��

147

Dynamic Stability Traction Control(DSTC)

The stability system consists of a number offunctions designed help reduce wheel spin,counteract skidding, and to generally helpimprove directional stability.

NOTE

A pulsating sound will be audible when thesystem is actively operating and is normal.

Traction control (TC)

This function is designed to help reduce wheelspin by transferring power from a drive wheelthat begins to lose traction to the wheel on theopposite side of the vehicle (on the same axle).

TC is most active at low speeds.

This is one of DSTC's permanent functions andcannot be switched off.

Spin control (SC)

The spin control function is designed to helpprevent the drive wheels from spinning whilethe vehicle is accelerating.

Under certain circumstances, such as whendriving with snow chains, or driving in deepsnow or loose sand, it may be advisable totemporarily switch off this function for maxi-mum tractive force.

G02

8511

Controls on the left-side steering wheel lever

Temporarily switching off Spin control

1. Turn the thumbwheel (1) on the left-sidesteering wheel lever until the DSTC

menu is displayed.

2. Hold down the RESET button (2) to togglebetween DSTC SPIN CONTROL ON orOFF.

NOTE

• The message DSTC SPIN CONTROL

OFF indicates that the stability sys-tem's spin control function has tempo-rarily been switched off.

• The stability control indicator light willilluminate and remain on until spin con-trol has been reactivated.

• The spin control function is automati-cally enabled each time the engine isstarted.

• DSTC ON indicates that all systemfunctions are active.

Active Yaw Control (AYC)

This function helps maintain directional stabil-ity, for example when cornering, by brakingone or more of the wheels if the vehicle showsa tendency to skid or slide laterally.

This is one of DSTC's permanent functions andcannot be switched off.

WARNING

The car's handling and stability characteris-tics will be altered if the DSTC system func-tions have been disabled.


Stability system

06

148

DSTC-related messages in the text

window

• TRACTION CONTROL TEMPORARILY

OFF – The system has been temporarilyswitched off due to high brake temperatureand will automatically switch on againwhen the brakes have cooled.

• "ANTI SKID SERVICE REQUIRED" – thesystem has been automatically disen-gaged due to a fault. A trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician should check thesystem.

Symbols in the instrument panel

The Stability Control indicator light

This light indicates different condi-tions, depending on how it illumi-nates.


illuminates for approximately 2 seconds

This indicates that the system is performing aself-diagnostic test when the ignition isswitched on.


flashes

This indicates that the stability system isactively functioning to help counteract wheelspin and/or a skid.


glows steadily

ANTI SKID SERVICE REQUIRED will be dis-played in the text window at the same time.

A fault is indicated in the stability system.

• Stop the vehicle in a safe place and switchoff the engine.

• Restart the engine.

• If the indicator light goes out, the fault wastemporary and no further action isrequired.

• If the indicator light remains on, drive to anauthorized Volvo workshop as soon aspossible to have the system checked.


glows steadily

If DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF is displayed inthe text window at the same time, this is areminder that spin control has been disabledby the driver.

The warning symbol

The warning symbol glows

steadily yellow

The system has been temporarily switched offdue to high brake temperature. "TRACTION

CONTROL TEMPORARILY OFF" will be dis-played. The system will automatically switchon again when the brakes have cooled.

WARNING

The stability system is intended to helpimprove driving safety. It supplements, butcan never replace, the driver's judgementand responsibility when operating the vehi-cle. Speed and driving style should alwaysbe adapted to traffic and road conditions.


Front/rear park assist*

06

��


Front/rear park assist

The park assist system is designed to assistyou when driving into parking spaces, garages,etc. It utilizes four ultrasound sensors locatedin one or both bumpers to measure the dis-tance to a vehicle, object, or a person who maybe close to the front or rear of your vehicle.

Park assist is available in two versions:

• Rear bumper only

• Front and rear bumpers

WARNING

Park Assist is an information system, NOT asafety system. This system is designed tobe a supplementary aid when parking thevehicle. It is not, however, intended toreplace the driver's attention and judge-ment.

Function

The system is activated automatically when thevehicle is started. The indicator light in the but-ton in the center console illuminates.

• The front park assist system is active fromthe time the engine is started until the vehi-cle exceeds a speed of approximately10 mph (15 km/h). It is also active when thevehicle is backing up.

• Rear park assist is active when the engineis running and reverse gear has beenselected.

Rear park assist

The distance monitored behind the vehicle isapproximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The signal comesfrom the rear speakers.

The system must be deactivated when towinga trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mountedcarrier, etc, which could trigger the rear parkassist system's sensors.

NOTE

Rear park assist is deactivated automati-cally when towing a trailer if Volvo genuinetrailer wiring is used.

Front park assist

The distance monitored in front of the vehicleis approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible sig-nal comes from the audio system's frontspeakers.

• It may not be possible to combine auxiliaryheadlights and front park assist sincethese lights could trigger the system's sen-sors.

Activating/deactivating park assist

The system is activated automatically when thevehicle is started.

• Press the Park assist button on the centerconsole (see page 60) to temporarily deac-tivate the system(s). The indicator light inthe button will go out when the system hasbeen deactivated.

• Park assist will be automatically reactiva-ted the next time the engine is started, or ifthe button is pressed (the indicator light inthe button will illuminate).


Front/rear park assist*

06


NOTE

• Front park assist is disengaged auto-matically when the parking brake isapplied.

• If the vehicle is equipped with front andrear park assist, both systems will bedeactivated by pressing the button.

Audible signals from the park assistsystem

The Park Assist system uses an intermittenttone that pulses faster as you come close to anobject, and becomes constant when you arewithin approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an objectin front of or behind the vehicle. If the volumeof another source from the audio system ishigh, this will be automatically lowered.

If there are objects within this distance bothbehind and in front of the vehicle, the signalalternates between front and rear speakers.

Faults in the system

If the yellow warning symbol illu-minates and PARK ASSIST

SERVICE REQUIRED is shownon the information display, thisindicates that the system is not

functioning properly and has been disengaged.Consult a trained and qualified Volvo servicetechnician.

CAUTION

In certain circumstances, the park assistsystem may give unexpected warning sig-nals that can be caused by external soundsources that use the same ultrasound fre-quencies as the system. This may includesuch things as the horns of other vehicles,wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes,motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This doesnot indicate a fault in the system.

Cleaning the sensors

G026946

Park assist sensors

The sensors must be cleaned regularly toensure that they work properly. Clean themwith water and a suitable car washing deter-gent.

Ice and snow covering the sensors may causeincorrect warning signals.

NOTE

If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt,snow, or ice, this could result in false warn-ing signals from the park assist system.


Towing

06

��

151

G027042

Positions for attaching towing eyelets

Emergency towing

The towing eyelet is located in the tool bag,under the floor of the cargo area. This eyeletmust be screwed into the positions providedon the right sides of either the front or rearbumper (see illustrations).

To attach the towing eyelet:

1. Use a coin to pry open the lower edge ofthe cover (A)

2. Screw the towing eyelet (C) in place (B),first by hand and then using the tire ironuntil it is securely in place.

After the vehicle has been towed, the eyeletshould be removed and returned to the toolbag. Press the cover back into position.

WARNING

Do not use the towing eyelets to pull thevehicle up onto a flat bed tow truck.

Precautions when the vehicle is in tow

• The steering wheel must be unlocked. Turnthe ignition key to position I or II.

• The gear selector must be in position N.

• Maximum speed: 50 mph (80 km/h). Do notexceed the maximum allowable towingspeed.

• Maximum distance with front wheels onground: 50 miles (80 km).

• While the vehicle is being towed, try tokeep the tow rope taut at all times.

• The vehicle should only be towed in theforward direction.


Towing

06

152

CAUTION

Vehicles with AWD (All Wheel Drive) with thefront wheels off the ground should not betowed at speeds above 50 mph (70 km/h) orfor distances longer than 30 miles (50 km).

CAUTION

• Please check with state and localauthorities before attempting this typeof towing, as vehicles being towed aresubject to regulations regarding maxi-mum towing speed, length and type oftowing device, lighting, etc.

• If the vehicle's battery is dead, do notattempt to start the vehicle by pushingor pulling it as this will damage thethree-way catalytic converter(s). Theengine must be jump started using anauxiliary battery (see page 143).

• If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bedtruck, the towing eyelets must not beused to pull the vehicle up onto the flatbed or to secure the vehicle on the flatbed. Consult the tow truck operator.

WARNING

• Remember that the power brakes andpower steering will not function whenengine is not running. The braking andsteering systems will function but con-siderably higher pressure will berequired on the brake pedal and greatersteering effort must be exerted.

• The towing eyelets must not be used forpulling the vehicle out of a ditch or forany similar purpose involving severestrain. Do not use the towing eyelets topull the vehicle up onto a flat bed towtruck.

G030862

Towing vehicles with front wheel drive/All Wheel Drive

Volvo recommends the use of flat bed equip-ment.

If wheel lift equipment must be used, pleaseuse extreme caution to help avoid damage tothe vehicle. In this case, the vehicle should

be towed with the rear wheels on the ground

if at all possible.

If it is absolutely necessary to tow the vehiclewith the front wheels on the ground, pleaserefer to the towing information on the previouspage.

CAUTION

• Sling-type equipment applied at thefront will damage radiator and air con-ditioning lines.

• It is equally important not to use sling-type equipment at the rear or apply lift-ing equipment inside the rear wheels;serious damage to the rear axle mayresult.

• If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bedtruck, the towing eyelets must not beused to secure the vehicle on the flatbed. Consult the tow truck operator.


Towing a trailer

06

��


The maximum weights recommended by Volvofor trailers with brakes are shown in the tablebelow.

Recommended hitch tongue load: not more

than 10% of the trailer's weight. The trailer

load should be positioned so that it does notshift and the tongue load should be 10% of thetrailer's weight. However, the tongue loadshould not exceed the maximum permissibleweights indicated in the table below.

No. of occu-pants

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Seating posi-tion

Front seat Front seat 2nd row ofseats

2nd row ofseats

2nd row ofseats

3rd row ofseats*

3rd row ofseats*

All Wheel Drive 5,000 lbs

(2250 kg)

5,000 lbs

(2250 kg)

4,500 lbs

(2050 kg)

3,700 lbs

(1700 kg)

2,900 lbs

(1350 kg)

1,800 lbs

(800 kg)

Trailer towingnot recom-mended

Max. trailerhitch tongueload

500 lbs

(225 kg)

500 lbs

(225 kg)

450 lbs

(205 kg)

370 lbs

(170 kg)

290 lbs

(135 kg)

180 lbs

(80 kg)

–

Front WheelDrive

4,000 lbs

(1800 kg)

4,000 lbs

(1800 kg)

4,000 lbs

(1800 kg)

4,000 lbs

(1800 kg)

3,700 lbs

(1650 kg)

2,500 lbs

(1150 kg)

1,400 lbs

(650 kg)

Max. trailerhitch tongueload

400 lbs

(180 kg)

400 lbs

(180 kg)

400 lbs

(180 kg)

400 lbs

(180 kg)

370 lbs

(165 kg)

250 lbs

(115 kg)

140 lba

(65 kg)


Towing a trailer

06

154

Points to keep in mind when towing a

trailer

• When towing trailers without brakes, themaximum permissible trailer weight is1,700 lbs (750 kg).

• If necessary, redistribute the weight of anycargo in the trailer to avoid excessiveweight on the trailer hitch.

• The maximum trailer weight listed in thetable for All Wheel Drive models, 5,000 lbs(2250 kg) is only applicable when there arenot more than two occupants in the vehi-cle, in the front seats, with a combinedweight of 300 lbs (135 kg), with no othercargo in the vehicle.

• The maximum weight listed for FrontWheel Drive models, 4,000 lbs (1800 kg) isonly applicable when there are not morethan four occupants in the vehicle, in thefront seats and second row of seats, witha combined weight of 600 lbs (270 kg), withno other cargo in the vehicle.

• Vehicles used for towing a trailer on a reg-ular basis, or for long-distance highwaytowing should be equipped with an auto-matic transmission oil cooler and Volvo'sautomatic self-leveling system for the rearsuspension. Consult your Volvo retailer.

• Volvo recommends the use of Volvo trailerhitches that are specially designed for thevehicle.

• All Volvo models are equipped withenergy-absorbing shock-mounted bump-ers. Trailer hitch installation should notinterfere with the proper operation of thisbumper system.

• Increase tire pressure to recommended fullinflation pressure. See chapter "Wheelsand tires."

• When your vehicle is new, avoid towingheavy trailers during the first 620 miles(1,000 km).

• Engine and transmission are subject toincreased loads. Therefore, engine coolanttemperature should be closely watchedwhen driving in hot climates or hilly terrain.Use a lower gear and turn off the air con-ditioner if the temperature gauge needleenters the red range.

• If the automatic transmission begins tooverheat, a message will be displayed inthe text window.

• Hauling a trailer affects handling, durabil-ity, and economy.

• It is necessary to balance trailer brakeswith the towing vehicle brakes to provide asafe stop (check and observe state/localregulations).

• Do not connect the trailer's brake systemdirectly to the vehicle's brake system.

• Remove the ball and drawbar assemblywhen the hitch is not being used.

• Volvo recommends the use of syntheticengine oil when towing a trailer over longdistances or in mountainous areas.

NOTE

• When parking the vehicle with a traileron a hill, apply the parking brake beforeputting the gear selector in P. Whenstarting on a hill, put the gear selector inD before releasing the parking brake.Always follow the trailer manufacturer'srecommendations for wheel chocking.

• If you use the manual (Geartronic) shiftpositions while towing a trailer, makesure the gear you select does not puttoo much strain on the engine (using toohigh a gear).


Towing a trailer

06

155

WARNING

• Bumper-attached trailer hitches mustnot be used on Volvos, nor shouldsafety chains be attached to thebumper.

• Trailer hitches attaching to the vehiclerear axle must not be used.

• Never connect a trailer's hydraulicbrake system directly to the vehiclebrake system, nor a trailer's lightingsystem directly to the vehicle lightingsystem. Consult a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician for correctinstallation.

• When towing a trailer, the trailer's safetywire must be correctly fastened to thehole or hook provided in the trailer hitchon the vehicle. The safety wire shouldnever be fastened to or wound aroundthe drawbar ball.

Smoother starts with a trailer

Models equipped with the V8-engine and the6-speed automatic transmission have a built-in function that reduces acceleration slightly infirst gear when the vehicle is towing a trailer.This is done to help avoid wheel spin and tomake starting off smoother.

• This function is activated when the trailer'selectrical connector is plugged into the

electrical socket mounted near the trailerhitch.

• The function is automatically deactivatedwhen the trailer's wiring is disconnectedfrom the socket. The vehicle will thenaccelerate normally.

NOTE

Since this function is activated when a con-nector is plugged into the electrical socketnear the trailer hitch, it will be activated byany electrical equipment (e.g. bicycle rackswith lighting, etc) that is plugged in, and willremain active until the equipment is unplug-ged from the socket.

Leveling

If your vehicle is equipped with automatic lev-eling, the rear suspension always retains thecorrect ride height regardless of the load.

• The system adjusts the rear suspension tothe correct level after the vehicle has beendriven a short distance.

• When the vehicle is stationary, the rearsuspension lowers, which is normal.


Detachable trailer hitch

06

156

Overview

A

C

EDB

G01

0496

Ball holder

Locking bolt

Cotter pin

Hitch assembly

Safety wire attachment

Installing the ball holder

1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin fromthe locking bolt and slide the locking boltout of the hitch assembly.

2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch assem-bly.

3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the onein the hitch assembly.

4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitchassembly/ball holder.

5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the endof the locking bolt.

Removing the ball holder

1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking boltand slide the locking bolt out of the ballholder/hitch assembly.

2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitch assem-bly.

A cover for the hitch assembly can be pur-chased from your Volvo retailer.


Load carriers (accessory)

06

157

Positioning load carriers

If wing-shaped load carriers are used, makesure that they are installed on the roof rails withthe rounded edge forward. Load carriers of thistype are identical and can be placed anywherealong the roof rails.

When not in use, we recommend that the frontload carrier be placed approximately 2 inches(5 cm) in front of the center roof rail anchoragepoint and the rear load carrier approximately1.5 inches (3.5 cm) in front of the rear railanchorage. This will help to reduce wind noise.

Installing load carriers

Make sure that the load carriers are pressedfirmly out against the roof rail and securelytightened place. Check regularly that any loadcarriers are securely in place.

WARNING

Loads carried on the vehicle's roof shouldnot exceed 220 lbs (100 kg), including theweight of the load carriers and any otherload carrying equipment (ski boxes, bicycleracks, etc.). Excessive loads on the roof canadversely affect the handling and roadhold-ing characteristics of the vehicle.


Cold weather precautions

06

158

If you wish to check your vehicle before theapproach of cold weather, the following adviceis worth noting:

• Make sure that the engine coolant contains50 percent antifreeze. Any other mixturewill reduce freeze protection. This givesprotection against freezing down to –31 °F(–35 °C). See section "Coolant".

• The use of "recycled" antifreeze is not

approved by Volvo. Different types of

antifreeze must not be mixed.

• Volvo recommends using only genuineVolvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator.Your Volvo retailer stocks plenty of Volvoengine coolant to protect your vehicle dur-ing cold weather.

• Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – thisprevents the formation of condensation inthe tank. In addition, in extremely coldweather conditions it is worthwhile to addfuel line de-icer before refueling.

• The viscosity of the engine oil is important.Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil) improvescold-weather starting as well as decreas-ing fuel consumption while the engine iswarming up. For winter use, 5W-30 oil, par-ticularly the synthetic type1, is recom-mended. Be sure to use good quality oil butdo not use cold-weather oil for hard driving

or in warm weather. See section "Engineoil" for more information.

• The load placed on the battery is greaterduring the winter since the windshield wip-ers, lighting, etc. are used more often.Moreover, the capacity of the batterydecreases as the temperature drops. Invery cold weather, a poorly charged bat-tery can freeze and be damaged. It is there-fore advisable to check the state of chargemore frequently and spray an antirust oil onthe battery posts.

• Volvo recommends the use of snow tires

on all four wheels for winter driving – seesection "Wheels and tires."

• To prevent the washer fluid reservoir

from freezing, add washer solvents con-taining antifreeze (see page 211 for thelocation of the washer fluid reservoir). Thisis important since dirt is often splashed onthe windshield during winter driving,requiring the frequent use of the washersand wipers. Volvo Washer Solvent shouldbe diluted as follows:

• Down to 14 ° F (–10 ° C): 1 part washersolvent and 4 parts water

• Down to 5 ° F (–15 ° C): 1 part washer sol-vent and 3 parts water

• Down to 0 ° F (–18 ° C):1 part washer sol-vent and 2 parts water

• Down to –18 ° F (–28 ° C): 1 part washersolvent and 1 part water

• Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks.

NOTE

Avoid the use of de-icing sprays as they cancause damage to the locks.

W – Winter/Wet driving mode – enhanced

vehicle traction

• Mode W will only function if the gear selec-tor is in the (D)rive position.

• Press the button at the base of the gearselector to engage/disengage this drivingmode.

• An LED in the button will light up to indicatethat W is engaged and this will also be dis-played in the instrument panel (seepage 54).

• This mode may be selected for starting/moving off on slippery roads.

1 Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is changed at the normal maintenance service intervals except at owner request and at additional charge. Please consult your Volvo retailer.


Before a long distance trip

06

159

It is always worthwhile to have your vehiclechecked by a trained and qualified Volvo serv-ice technician before driving long distances.Your retailer or service technician will also beable to supply you with bulbs, fuses, sparkplugs and wiper blades for your use in the eventthat problems occur.

As a minimum, the following items should bechecked before any long trip:

• Check that engine runs smoothly and thatfuel consumption is normal.

• Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage.

• Check transmission oil level1.

• Check condition of drive belts.

• Check state of the battery's charge.

• Examine tires carefully (the spare tire aswell), and replace those that are worn.Check tire pressures.

• The brakes, front wheel alignment, andsteering gear should be checked by atrained and qualified Volvo service techni-cian only.

• Check all lights, including high beams.

• Reflective warning triangles are legallyrequired in some states/provinces.

• Have a word with your Volvo retailer if youintend to drive in countries where it may bedifficult to obtain the correct fuel.

• Consider your destination. If you will bedriving through an area where snow or iceare likely to occur, consider snow tires.

1 To prevent injury from contact with hot surfaces, do not inspect your vehicle’s transmission fluid yourself. Have your vehicle’s transmission fluid level inspected by a qualified Volvo service technician.


Blind Spot Information System

06

160

G020295

BLIS camera

Indicator light

BLIS symbol

The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is aninformation system that indicates the presenceof another vehicle moving in the same directionas your vehicle in the side-view mirror's "blindarea."

The system is based on digital camera tech-nology. The cameras (1) are located beneaththe side-view mirrors.

When one (or both) of the cameras havedetected a vehicle in the blind area (up toapproximately 10 ft. (3 meters) from the side of

your vehicle, and up to approximately 31 ft.(9.5 meters) behind the side-view mirror), seethe illustration, the indicator light in the doorpanel (2) illuminates. The light will glow contin-uously to alert the driver of the vehicle in theblind area.

WARNING

• BLIS is an information system, NOT awarning or safety system.

• BLIS does not eliminate the need foryou to visually confirm the conditionsaround you, and the need for you to turnyour head and shoulders to make surethat you can safely change lanes.

• As the driver, you have full responsibilityfor changing lanes in a safe manner.

NOTE

The door panel indicator light illuminates onthe side of the vehicle where the system hasdetected another vehicle. If your vehicle ispassed on both sides at the same time, bothlights will illuminate.

A

B

G020296

Areas monitored by BLIS

Distance A = approx. 10 ft. (3 meters)

Distance B = approx. 31 ft. (9.5 meters)

BLIS has an integrated function that alerts thedriver if a fault should occur with the system.For example, if one or both of the system'scameras are obscured, a message ( see thetable on page 162) will appear in the informa-tion display in the instrument panel. If thisoccurs, clean the camera lenses. If necessary,the system can be temporarily switched off (forinstructions, see page 162).

When does BLIS function

The system functions when your vehicle ismoving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).



06

��

161

When you pass another vehicle:

The system reacts when you pass anothervehicle at a speed of up to 6 mph (10 km/h)faster than that vehicle.

When you are passed by another vehicle:

The system reacts if your vehicle is passed byanother vehicle at a speed of up to 43 mph(70 km/h) faster than your vehicle.

WARNING

• BLIS does not function in sharp curves.

• BLIS does not function when your vehi-cle is backing up.

• If you are towing a wide trailer, this mayprevent the BLIS cameras from detect-ing other vehicles in adjacent lanes.

How BLIS functions in daylight and

darkness

Daylight

BLIS reacts to the shape of surrounding vehi-cles. The system is designed to help detectmotor vehicles such as cars, trucks, buses,motorcycles, etc.

Darkness

BLIS reacts to the headlights of surroundingvehicles. In order to be detected by BLIS, a

vehicle in the blind area must have its head-lights on. This means, for example, that thesystem will not detect a trailer without head-lights that is being towed behind a car or truck.

WARNING

• BLIS does not react to cyclists ormopeds.

• BLIS does not react to vehicles that arestanding still.

• The function of the BLIS cameras maybe affected by intense light, or whendriving at night in areas where there areno external sources of light (e.g., streetlights, other vehicles, etc.). In suchcases, the system may react as if thecameras were obscured.

• In both of the above mentioned condi-tions, a message will appear in the infor-mation display.

• When driving in such conditions, thesystem can be temporarily switched off.For instructions, see page 162.

• When the message is no longer dis-played, BLIS will return to normal func-tion.

• The BLIS cameras have the same limi-tation as the human eye. In other words,their "vision is impaired" by adverseweather conditions such as heavysnowfall, dense fog, etc.



06

162

Cleaning the BLIS camera lenses

In order to function optimally, the BLIS cameralenses must be kept clean. They can be wipedclean with a soft cloth or wet sponge.

CAUTION

• Clean the lenses carefully to avoidscratching.

• The lenses are electrically heated tohelp melt ice or snow. If necessary, gen-tly brush away snow from the lenses.

Limitations

In certain situations, the BLIS indicator light(s)may illuminate even when there are no othervehicles in the area monitored by the system.

NOTE

If the BLIS indicator lights illuminate occa-sionally even when there are no other vehi-cles in the blind area, this does not indicatea fault in the system.

In the event of a fault, Blind spot syst.service required will be displayed.

The following are several examples of situa-tions in which the BLIS indicator light(s) mayilluminate even when there are no other vehi-cles in the area monitored by the system.

Light reflected from a wet road surface

G018177

The vehicle's own shadow against a large, light,smooth surface such as barriers between lanes ona highway

Sunlight directly in the camera when the sun is lowon the horizon

G026955

Switching BLIS on and off

BLIS is automatically activated when the igni-tion is switched on. The indicator lights willprovide confirmation by flashing 3 times.

• The system can be switched off by press-ing the BLIS button in the center console(see the illustration). The indicator light inthe button goes out when the system isswitched off, and a text message is dis-played.

• BLIS can be switched on again by pressingthe button. The indicator light in the buttonwill illuminate and a new text message willbe displayed. Press the READ button (seepage 58) to erase the message.



06

163

System status Text in the dis-play

BLIS NOT FUNC-TIONING PROP-ERLY

BLIND-SPOT

SYST SERVICE

REQUIRED

RIGHT CAMERAOBSCURED

BLIND-SPOT

SYST R CAMERA

BLOCKED

LEFT CAMERAOBSCURED

BLIND-SPOT

SYST L CAMERA

BLOCKED

BOTH CAMERASOBSCURED

BLIND-SPOT

SYST CAMERAS

BLOCKED

BLIS SYSTEM OFF BLIND-SPOT INFO

SYSTEM OFF

BLIS SYSTEM ON BLIND-SPOT INFO

SYSTEM ON

BLIS FUNCTIONREDUCED

BLIND-SPOT

SYST FUNCTION

REDUCED

The messages listed above can only be dis-played if the ignition key is in position II (or ifthe engine is running) and if BLIS is active (i.e.

if the system has not been turned off by press-ing the BLIS button).

G020918

164

General information............................................................................... 166Tire inflation .......................................................................................... 169Tire inflation pressure tables – U.S. models......................................... 171Tire inflation pressure tables – Canadian models................................. 172Tire designations................................................................................... 173Glossary of tire terminology.................................................................. 175Vehicle loading...................................................................................... 176Uniform Tire Quality Grading................................................................ 177Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires................................................ 178Temporary spare................................................................................... 179Changing wheels................................................................................... 180Tire Sealing System ............................................................................. 184Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – U.S. models only.............. 189

07WHEELS AND T IRES

07 Wheels and tires

General information

07

166

Introduction

Your vehicle is equipped with tires accordingto the vehicle's tire information placard on theB-pillar (the structural member at the side ofthe vehicle, at the rear of the driver's dooropening), or on the inside of the fuel filler dooron Canadian models.

CAUTION

Some Volvo models are equipped with anUltra High Performance tire and wheel com-bination designed to provide maximum drypavement performance with considerationfor hydroplaning resistance. As such, theymay be more susceptible to road hazarddamage and, depending on driving condi-tions, may achieve a tread life of less than20,000 miles (30,000 km). Even if this vehi-cle is equipped with Volvo’s advanced AWDor DSTC system, these tires are notdesigned for winter driving, and should bereplaced with winter tires when weatherconditions dictate.

The tires have good road holding characteris-tics and offer good handling on dry and wetsurfaces. It should be noted however that thetires have been developed to give these fea-tures on snow/ice-free surfaces.

Certain models are equipped with "all-season"tires, which provide a somewhat higher degree

of road holding on slippery surfaces than tireswithout the "all-season" rating. However, foroptimum road holding on icy or snow-coveredroads, we recommend suitable winter tires onall four wheels.

When replacing tires, be sure that the new tiresare the same size designation, type (radial) andpreferably from the same manufacturer, on allfour wheels. Otherwise there is a risk of alteringthe car's roadholding and handling characte-ristics.

New Tires

Remember that tires are per-ishable goods. As of 2000, themanufacturing week and year(Department of Transporta-tion (DOT) stamp) will be indi-cated with 4 digits (e.g. 1502means that the tire illustrated

was manufactured during week 15 of 2002).

Tire age

Tires degrade over time, even when they arenot being used. It is recommended that tiresgenerally be replaced after 6 years of normalservice. Heat caused by hot climates, frequenthigh loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V)exposure can accelerate the aging process.

You should replace the spare tire when youreplace the other road tires due to the aging ofthe spare.

A tire's age can be determined by the DOTstamp on the sidewall (see the illustration).

A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discolorationshould be replaced immediately.

Improving tire economy

• Maintain correct tire pressure. For the tirepressure tables, see pages 171 and 172.

• Drive smoothly: avoid fast starts, hardbraking and tire screeching.

• Tire wear increases with speed.

• Correct front wheel alignment is veryimportant.

• Unbalanced wheels impair tire economyand driving comfort.

• Tires must maintain the same direction ofrotation throughout their lifetime.

• When replacing tires, the tires with themost tread should be mounted on the rearwheels to reduce the chance of oversteerduring hard braking.

• Hitting curbs or potholes can damage thetires and/or wheels permanently.

07 Wheels and tires

General information

07

��

167

Summer and winter tires

G020325

The arrows shows the direction of rotation of thetire

• When switching between summer andwinter tires, mark the tires to indicatewhere they were mounted on the car, e.g.,LF = left front, RR = right rear

• Tires with tread designed to roll in only onedirection are marked with an arrow on thesidewall.

• Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car'sbraking properties and ability to forceaside rain, snow and slush.

• The tires with the most tread should alwaysbe at the rear (to reduce the risk of skid-ding).

• Contact a Volvo workshop if you areunsure about the tread depth.

Storing wheels and tires

When storing complete wheels (tires mountedon rims), they should be suspended off thefloor or placed on their sides on the floor.

Tires not mounted on rims should be stored ontheir sides or standing upright, but should notbe suspended.

CAUTION

Tires should preferably be stored in a cool,dry, dark place, and should never be storedin close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils,etc.

WARNING

• The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvoare specified to meet stringent stabilityand handling requirements. Unap-proved wheel/tire size combinationscan negatively affect your vehicle's sta-bility and handling. Approved tire sizesare shown in the Tire inflation pressuretables on pages 171 and 172.

• Any damage caused by installation ofunapproved wheel/tire size combina-tions will not be covered by your newvehicle warranty. Volvo assumes noresponsibility for death, injury, orexpenses that may result from suchinstallations.

Tire wear

Tire rotation

Tire wear is affected by a number of factorssuch as tire inflation, ambient temperature,driving style, etc. Your vehicle is driven mainlyby the front tires, which will wear faster.

If the tires are rotated, they should only bemoved from front to back or vice versa. Theyshould never be rotated left to right/right to left.

However, tire rotation, done at the recom-mended intervals, is one way of helping to keep

07 Wheels and tires

General information

07

168

tread wear as even as possible and will helpyou get maximum mileage from your tires.

Ideally, tire rotation should be done the firsttime after approximately 3,000 miles(5, 000 km) and thereafter at 6,000 mile(10,000 km) intervals.

Tire rotation should only be performed if front/rear tire wear is fairly even and tread height isabove 1/16" (1.6 mm).

NOTE

Tire rotation is not included in regularlyscheduled maintenance and is performedonly at customer request, at additionalcharge.

Your Volvo retailer can also provide guidancebased on your particular driving circumstan-ces.

Tread wear indicator

G020323

The tires have wear indicator strips runningacross or parallel to the tread. The letters TWI

are printed on the side of the tire. Whenapproximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on thetread, these strips become visible and indicatethat the tire should be replaced. Tires with lessthan 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very poor trac-tion.

When replacing worn tires, it is recommendedthat the tire be identical in type (radial) and sizeas the one being replaced. Using a tire of thesame make (manufacturer) will prevent altera-tion of the driving characteristics of the vehicle.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation

07

��

169

G032513

Tire inflation placards on U.S. models

Check tire inflation pressure regularly.

Tables listing the recommended inflation pres-sure for your vehicle can be found on pages171 and 172. A tire inflation pressure placardis also located on the driver's side B-pillar (thestructural member at the side of the vehicle, atthe rear of the driver's door opening). This plac-ard indicates the designation of the factory-mounted tires on your vehicle, as well as loadlimits and inflation pressure.

G032520

Tire inflation placard on Canadian models

NOTE

The placards shown indicate inflation pres-sure for the tires installed on the vehicle atthe factory only.

• Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflationpressure, including the spare, at least oncea month and before long trips. You arestrongly urged to buy a reliable tire pres-sure gauge, as automatic service stationgauges may be inaccurate.

• Use the recommended cold inflation pres-sure for optimum tire performance andwear.

• Under-inflation or over-inflation may causeuneven treadwear patterns.

WARNING

• Under-inflation is the most commoncause of tire failure and may result insevere tire cracking, tread separation,or "blow-out," with unexpected loss ofvehicle control and increased risk ofinjury.

• Under-inflated tires reduce the load car-rying capacity of your vehicle.

When weather temperature changes occur, tireinflation pressures also change. A 10-degreetemperature drop causes a correspondingdrop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Checkyour tire pressures frequently and adjust themto the proper pressure, which can be found onthe vehicle's tire information placard or certifi-cation label.

Checking tire pressure

A certain amount of air seepage from the tiresoccurs naturally and tire pressure fluctuateswith seasonal changes in temperature. Alwayscheck tire pressure regularly.

Cold tires

Inflation pressure should be checked when thetires are cold.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation

07

170

The tires are considered to be cold when

they have the same temperature as the sur-

rounding (ambient) air.

This temperature is normally reached after thevehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours.

After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile(1.6 km), the tires are considered to be hot. Ifyou have to drive farther than this distance topump your tire(s), check and record the tirepressure first and add the appropriate air pres-sure when you get to the pump.

If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot,never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The tiresare hot from driving and it is normal for pres-sures to increase above recommended coldpressures. A hot tire at or below recommendedcold inflation pressure could be significantlyunder-inflated.

To check inflation pressure:

1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire,then firmly press the tire gauge onto thevalve.

2. Add air to reach the recommended airpressure.

3. Replace the valve cap.

4. Repeat this procedure for each tire, includ-ing the spare.

5. Visually inspect the tires to make sure thereare no nails or other objects embeddedthat could puncture the tire and cause anair leak.

6. Check the sidewalls to make sure there areno gouges, cuts, bulges or other irregular-ities.

NOTE

• If you overfill the tire, release air bypushing on the metal stem in the centerof the valve. Then recheck the pressurewith your tire gauge.

• Some spare tires require higher inflationpressure than the other tires. Consultthe tire inflation tables on pages 171and 172 or see the inflation pressureplacard.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressure tables – U.S. models

07

171

The following tire pressures are recommendedby Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire infla-tion placard for information specific to the tiresinstalled on your vehicle at the factory.

Cold tire pressures up to five per-sons

Tire size Front, psi(kPa)

Rear, psi(kPa)

XC90

225/70R16

235/65R17

235/60R18

255/50R19

255/45R20

36 (250) 36 (250)

Temporaryspare tire

T155/85R18

61 (420) 61 (420)

Load ratings

The load ratings on the tire's sidewall translateas follows, for example:

102 = 1874 lbs (850 kg)

104 = 1984 lbs (900 kg)

107 = 2150 lbs (975 kg)

Speed ratings

The speed ratings on the tire's sidewall trans-late as follows, for example:

M = 81 mph (130 km/h)

H = 130 mph (210 km/h)

V = 149 mph (240 km/h)

Y = 186 mph (300 km/h)

See also page 173 for an explanation of thedesignations on the sidewall of the tire.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressure tables – Canadian models

07

172

The following tire pressures are recommendedby Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire infla-

tion placard for information specific to the tiresinstalled on your vehicle at the factory.

Cold tire pressures up to five persons

Tire size Cold tire pressures up to five persons psi (kPa) Optional pressure up to three persons psi (kPa)

Front Rear Front Rear

225/70R16

235/65R17

235/60R18

39 (270) 39 (270) 32 (220) 32 (220)

255/50R19

255/45R20

39 (270) 39 (270) 35 (240) 35 (240)

Temporary spare tire

T155/85R18

61 (420) 61 (420) 61 (420) 61 (420)

07 Wheels and tires

Tire designations

07

��

173

1

2

3

4

5

6

12

11

10

8

7 9

G026442

Federal law mandates that tire manufacturersplace standardized information on the sidewallof all tires (see the illustration).

The following information is listed on the tiresidewall:

The tire designation:

NOTE

Please be aware that the following tire des-ignation is an example only and that thisparticular tire may not be available on yourvehicle.

215: the width of the tire (in millimeters)from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. Thelarger the number, the wider the tire.

65: The ratio of the tire's height to its width.

R: Radial tire.

15: The diameter of the wheel rim (ininches).

95: The tire's load index. In this example, aload index of 95 equals a maximum load of1521 lbs (690 kg).

H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximumspeed at which the tire is designed to bedriven for extended periods of time, carry-ing a permissible load for the vehicle, andwith correct inflation pressure. For exam-ple, H indicates a speed rating of 130 mph(210 km/h).

NOTE

This information may not appear on the tirebecause it is not required by law.

M+S or M/

S = Mud and Snow; AT = All Terrain; AS =All Season

U.S.

DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): Thisbegins with the letters "DOT" and indicatesthat the tire meets all federal standards.The next two numbers or letters are theplant code where it was manufactured, thenext two are the tire size code and the lastfour numbers represent the week and yearthe tire was built. For example, 2501means the 25th week of 2001. The num-bers in between are marketing codes usedat the manufacturer's discretion. This infor-mation helps a tire manufacturer identify atire for safety recall purposes.

Tire Ply Composition and Material Used:Indicates the number of plies indicates orthe number of layers of rubber-coated fab-ric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire man-ufacturers also must indicate the ply mate-rials in the tire and the sidewall, whichinclude steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

Maximum Load: Indicates the maximumload in pounds and kilograms that can becarried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tireinformation placard located on the B-Pillaror the driver's door for the correct tire pres-sure for your vehicle.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire designations

07

174

Treadwear, Traction, and Temperaturegrades: see page 177 for more informa-tion.

Maximum permissible inflation pressure:the greatest amount of air pressure thatshould ever be put in the tire. This limit isset by the tire manufacturer.

Tire suppliers may have additional markings,notes or warnings such as standard load, radialtubeless, etc.

07 Wheels and tires

Glossary of tire terminology

07

175

• Tire information placard: A placardshowing the OE (Original Equipment) tiresizes, recommended inflation pressure,and the maximum weight the vehicle cancarry.

• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A num-ber on the sidewall of each tire providinginformation about the tire brand and man-ufacturing plant, tire size and date of man-ufacturer.

• Inflation pressure: A measure of theamount of air in a tire.

• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Met-ric tires designed to carry a maximum loadat 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires].Increasing the inflation pressure beyondthis pressure will not increase the tires loadcarrying capability.

• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metrictires designed to carry a heavier maximumload at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metrictires]. Increasing the inflation pressurebeyond this pressure will not increase thetires load carrying capability.

• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres-sure.

• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standardunit of air pressure.

• B-pillar: The structural member at the sideof the vehicle behind the front door.

• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire nextto the rim.

• Sidewall of the tire: Area between thebead area and the tread.

• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perim-eter of the tire that contacts the road whenmounted on the vehicle.

• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire ora tire and tube assembly upon which thetire beads are seated.

• Maximum load rating: a figure indicatingthe maximum load in pounds and kilo-grams that can be carried by the tire. Thisrating is established by the tire manufac-turer.

• Maximum permissible inflation pres-

sure: the greatest amount of air pressurethat should ever be put in the tire. This limitis set by the tire manufacturer.

• Recommended tire inflation pressure:

inflation pressure, established by Volvo,which is based on the type of tires that aremounted on a vehicle at the factory. Thisinflation pressure is affected by the numberof occupants in the vehicle, the amount ofcargo, and the speed at which the vehiclewill be driven for a prolonged period. Thisinformation can be found on the tire infla-tion placard(s) located on the driver's sideB-pillar and in the tire inflation table in thischapter.

• Cold tires: The tires are considered to becold when they have the same temperatureas the surrounding (ambient) air. This tem-perature is normally reached after the vehi-cle has been parked for at least 3 hours.

07 Wheels and tires

Vehicle loading

07

176

Properly loading your vehicle will provide maxi-mum return of vehicle design performance.

Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourselfwith the following terms for determining yourvehicle's weight ratings, with or without atrailer, from the vehicle's Federal/ CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire informa-tion placard.

Curb weight

The weight of the vehicle including a full tankof fuel and all standard equipment. It does notinclude passengers, cargo, or optional equip-ment.

Capacity weight

All weight added to the curb weight, includingcargo and optional equipment. When towing,trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargoweight.

NOTE

For trailer towing information, please refer tothe section "Towing a trailer."

Permissible axle weight

The maximum allowable weight that can becarried by a single axle (front or rear). These

numbers are shown on the Federal/CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle mustnever exceed its maximum permissible weight.

Gross vehicle weight (GVW)

The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passen-gers.

A table listing important weight limits for yourvehicle, is in chapter "Dimension and weights".

For the location of the various labels in yourvehicle, see page 264

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit

• Locate the statement "the combinedweight of occupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX pounds" on your vehi-cle's placard.

• Determine the combined weight of thedriver and passengers that will be riding inyour vehicle.

• Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kilograms orXXX pounds.

• The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the "XXX" amountequals 1400 lbs. and there will be five

150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x150) = 650 lbs.)

• Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual1 to determinehow this reduces the available cargo andluggage load capacity of your vehicle.

WARNING

• Exceeding the permissible axle weight,gross vehicle weight, or any otherweight rating limits can cause tire over-heating resulting in permanent defor-mation or catastrophic failure.

• Do not use replacement tires with lowerload carrying capacities than the tiresthat were original equipment on thevehicle because this will lower the vehi-cle's GVW rating. Replacement tireswith a higher limit than the originals donot increase the vehicle's GVW ratinglimitations.

1 For "Towing a trailer" see page 153.

07 Wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

07

177

ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST

CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY

REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE

GRADES

Quality grades can be found, where appli-

cable, on the tire sidewall between the tread

shoulder and maximum section width. For

example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

TREADWEAR

The treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified gov-ernment test course. For example, a tire gra-ded 150 would wear one and one half (1 1/2)times as well on the government course as atire graded 100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and many depart signifi-cantly from the norm due to variation in drivinghabits, maintenance practices and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

TRACTION

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlledconditions on specified government test sur-faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on braking (straight-ahead) tractiontests and is not a measure of cornering(turning) traction.

TEMPERATURE

The temperature grades are AA (the highest),A, B, and C, representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and its ability to dis-sipate heat when tested under controlled con-ditions on a specified indoor laboratory testwheel. Sustained high temperature can causethe material of the tire to degenerate andreduce tire life, and excessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-sponds to a minimum level of performance thatall passenger vehicle tires must meet under theFederal Motor Safety Standard No. 109.Grades B and A represent higher levels of per-formance on the laboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-rately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and tire failure.

07 Wheels and tires

Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires

07

178

Snow chains

Snow chains can be used on your Volvo withthe following restrictions:

• Snow chains should be installed on frontwheels only. Use only Volvo approvedsnow chains.

• If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" tiresand wheels are installed and are of a sizedifferent than the original tires and wheels,chains in some cases CANNOT be used.Sufficient clearances between chains andbrakes, suspension and body componentsmust be maintained.

• Some strap-on type chains will interferewith brake components and thereforeCANNOT be used.

• All Wheel Drive models: Snow chainsshould only be installed on the frontwheels.

Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snowchain information.

CAUTION

• Check local regulations regarding theuse of snow chains before installing.

• Always follow the chain manufacturer'sinstallation instructions carefully. Installchains as tightly as possible andretighten periodically.

• Never exceed the chain manufacturer'sspecified maximum speed limit. (Underno circumstances should you exceed31 mph (50 km/h)).

• Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turnswhen driving with snow chains.

• The handling of the vehicle can beadversely affected when driving withchains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as wellas locked wheel braking.

Snow tires, studded tires1

Tires for winter use:

• Owners who live in or regularly commutethrough areas with sustained periods ofsnow or icy driving conditions are stronglyadvised to fit suitable winter tires to helpretain the highest degree of traction.

• It is important to install winter tires on allfour wheels to help retain traction during

cornering, braking, and accelerating. Fail-ure to do so could reduce traction to anunsafe level or adversely affect handling.

• Do not mix tires of different design as thiscould also negatively affect overall tire roadgrip.

• Winter tires wear more quickly on dry roadsin warm weather. They should be removedwhen the winter driving season has ended.

• Studded tires should be run-in300-600 miles (500-1000 km) during whichthe vehicle should be driven as smoothlyas possible to give the studs the opportu-nity to seat properly in the tires. The tiresshould have the same rotational directionthroughout their entire lifetime.

NOTE

Please consult state or provincial regula-tions restricting the use of studded wintertires before installing such tires.

1 Where permitted

07 Wheels and tires

Temporary spare

07

179

The spare tire in your vehicle1 is called a "Tem-porary Spare".

Recommended tire pressure (see the placardon the B-pillar or on the fuel filler door) shouldbe maintained irrespective of which position onthe vehicle the temporary spare tire is used.

In the event of damage to this tire, a new onecan be purchased from your Volvo retailer.

WARNING

Current legislation prohibits the use of the"Temporary Spare" tire other than as a tem-porary replacement for a punctured tire. Itmust be replaced as soon as possible by astandard tire. Road holding and handlingmay be affected with the "TemporarySpare" in use. Do not exceed 50 mph(80 km/h).

CAUTION

The vehicle must not be driven with wheelsof different dimensions or with a spare tireother than the one that came with the vehi-cle. The use of different size wheels canseriously damage your vehicle's transmis-sion.

1 Not on models equipped with the Tire sealing system.

07 Wheels and tires

Changing wheels

07

180

G03

0879

Jack location in 7-seat models

Jack location in 5-seat models

Changing wheels

Location of jack, five-seat models

The jack is located to the right under the rearhatch in the cargo area floor. Lift this hatch andrelease the retaining strap to lift out the jack.

The rear section of the jack's crank and the toolbag are stowed to the left under the hatch. Thefront section of the crank is stored in the toolbag. The tool bag also contains a tool for

removing certain optional wheel covers. Con-sult your Volvo retailer.

NOTE

The rear section of the crank is enclosed ina protective sleeve that should be slid offbefore the crank is used. We recommendreinserting the crank into this sleeve beforethe crank is stowed.

If the vehicle is equipped with the optional gro-cery bag holder: Fold up the rear section of thecargo area floor, disconnect the grocery bagholder's retaining cords and fold up the lowersection of the floor to access the tool bag.

Location of jack, seven-seat models

The jack is located in the center under the rearhatch in the cargo area floor. Lift this hatch andrelease the retaining strap to slide out the jack.

The rear section of the jack's crank and the toolbag are stowed to the left under the hatch. Thefront section of the crank is stored in the toolbag.

The rear section of the crank is enclosed in aprotective sleeve that should be slid off beforethe crank is used. We recommend reinsertingthe crank into this sleeve before the crank isstowed.

07 Wheels and tires

Changing wheels

07

��

181

If the vehicle is equipped with the optional gro-cery bag holder: Fold up the rear section of thecargo area floor, disconnect the grocery bagholder's retaining cords and fold up the lowersection of the floor.

CAUTION

Seven-seat models: Do not store objectsin the area for the rear seat cushions (whenthe backrests are to be folded down). Thiscould damage the cushions.

Lowering the spare wheel

The spare wheel is located under the floor ofthe rear cargo compartment. It can be loweredusing the crank (see previous page for loca-tion).

WARNING

When raising or lowering the spare wheel,please keep in mind that components in theexhaust system may be very hot.

To lower the spare wheel:

1. Fold down the lower section of the tailgate.

2. Fold up the rear section of the floor in thecargo compartment.

3. Connect the two sections of the jack'scrank.

4. Insert the hooked end of the crank in thespare wheel retaining attachment.

5. Lower the spare wheel under the vehicle byturning the crank counterclockwise until itis not possible to turn it further.

6. Pivot the toggle at the end of the cable 90degrees to release it from the spare wheel

CAUTION

When the spare wheel is mounted on thevehicle, the retaining cable could damagethe underside of the vehicle if it is not retrac-ted.

7. Crank up the cable again by turning thecrank clockwise.

8. Place the wheel with the flat tire in the vehi-cle's cargo compartment.

NOTE

The space under the vehicle is designed tohold the special spare wheel only. Other full-size wheels will not fit in this compartment.

G026996

Returning the spare wheel to the storage

compartment

1. Use the crank (turn it counterclockwise) tolower the spare wheel's retaining cable.

2. Pass the toggle at the end of the cablethrough the center hole in the spare wheel.Pivot the toggle 90 degrees so that whenraised, the wheel will rest on the toggle.

3. Retract the retaining cable slightly byslowly turning the crank clockwise severaltimes.

4. Position the wheel so that it is not obstruc-ted by components in the exhaust system.

07 Wheels and tires

Changing wheels

07

182

5. Continue to raise the wheel by turning thecrank clockwise. Raise the wheel a little bitat a time and guide it around the rear axleuntil it is securely seated in the storagearea.

6. When it is no longer possible to turn thecrank any further, check that the sparewheel is securely in position in the storagecompartment.

G026997

Jack attachment points

Jack attachments

There are two attachment points for the jack oneach side of the vehicle. These attachmentpoints are under the center of each door.

WARNING

There is an attachment point on each sideof the vehicle located under the pillarsbetween the front and rear doors. This pointis used during the production process only,and is NOT intended for attaching the jack.

G020332

WARNING

The undersides of accessory runningboards are not intended for attaching thejack.

Changing a wheel

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level, non-slip-pery surface.

2. Engage the parking brake and put the gearselector in the Park position.

3. Loosen the wheel bolts by exerting down-ward pressure on the lug wrench.

4. Remove the wheel cover (where applica-ble) using the lug wrench in the tool bag.

5. With the wheels still on the ground, use thelug wrench to loosen the wheel bolts 1/2 – 1turn. Turn the bolts counterclockwise toloosen the bolts.

G027000

Attaching the jack

07 Wheels and tires

Changing wheels

07

183

6. Place the jack on the ground, under one ofthe attachment points (see the illustration)and crank while simultaneously guiding thejack's attachment bracket onto the attach-ment point (see illustration) The base of thejack must be flat on a level, firm, non-slip-pery surface. Before raising the vehicle,check that the jack is still correctly posi-tioned in the attachment.

7. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to bechanged is lifted off the ground.

8. Unscrew the wheel bolts completely andcarefully remove the wheel so as not todamage the threads on the studs.

NOTE

To avoid excessive wear and the necessityof rebalancing, mark and reinstall wheels inthe same location and position as beforeremoval. To lessen the chance of imbal-ance, each wheel hub is equipped with aguide stud to ensure that a removed wheelcan be reinstalled in its original position (aswhen changing over to winter tires/wheels).

CAUTION

• The vehicle must not be driven withwheels of different dimensions or with aspare tire other than the one that camewith the vehicle. The use of different sizewheels can seriously damage your vehi-cle's transmission.

• Correct tightening torque on wheelbolts must be observed.

• The wheel bolts should never begreased or lubricated.

• Extended, chromed wheel bolts mustnot be used with steel rims, as theymake it impossible to fit the hub caps.

Installing the wheel

1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheeland hub.

2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub.

3. Install the wheel bolts and tighten hand-tight. Using the lug wrench, tighten cross-wise until all bolts are snug.

4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alter-nately tighten the bolts crosswise to103 ft.lbs. (140 Nm).

5. Install the wheel cover (where applicable).

WARNING

• The jack must correctly engage the barin the jack attachment. The vehicle'sweight must not rest on the jack attach-ment. See illustration "Attaching thejack" on the previous page.

• Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non-slippery surface.

• Never allow any part of your body to beextended under a vehicle supported bya jack.

• Use the jack intended for the vehiclewhen replacing a wheel. For any otherjob, use stands to support the side ofthe vehicle being worked on.

• Apply the parking brake and put thegear selector in the (P)ark position.

• Block the wheels standing on theground, use rigid wooden blocks orlarge stones.

• The jack should be kept well-greasedand clean, and should not be damaged.

• No objects should be placed betweenthe base of jack and the ground, orbetween the jack and the attachmentbar on the vehicle.

The jack and tools should be returned to theirstorage spaces. The jack should be crankeddown fully so that it fits into the intended space.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

07


Introduction

Certain models are equipped with a tire sealingsystem* that enables you to temporarily seal ahole in the tread surface and re-inflate a flat tire,or to adjust a tire’s inflation pressure.

The system consists of an air compressor, acontainer for the sealing compound, wiring toconnect the system to the vehicle’s electricalsystem via one of the 12-volt sockets, and ahose used to connect the system to the tire’sinflation valve.

The 12-volt sockets are located on the rear sideof the center console (in the rear seat) and inthe cargo area.

Accessing the tire sealing system

The tire sealing system is stowed under thefloor of the cargo area. To access it:

1. Fold up or remove any protective floor cov-ering or carpet.

2. Open the floor hatch.3. Lift out the tire sealing system.

NOTE

• The tire sealing system is only intendedto seal holes on the tire’s tread area, notthe sidewall.

• Tires with large holes or tears cannot berepaired with the tire sealing system.

• After use, stow the tire sealing systemproperly to help prevent rattling.

WARNING

• After using the tire sealing system, thevehicle should not be driven farther thanapproximately 120 miles (200 km).

• Have the tire inspected by a trained andqualified Volvo service technician assoon as possible to determine if it canbe permanently repaired or must bereplaced.

• The vehicle should not be driven fasterthan 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tirethat has been temporarily repaired withthe tire sealing system.

• After using the tire sealing system, drivecarefully and avoid abrupt steeringmaneuvers and sudden stops.

Tire sealing system–overview

G020400

Speed limit sticker

On/Off switch

Electrical wire

Bottle holder (orange cover)

Protective hose cover

Air release knob

Hose

Bottle with sealing compound

Air pressure gauge

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

07

��

185

WARNING

Please keep the following points in mindwhen using the tire sealing system:

• The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 inthe illustration) contains 1.2-Ethanoland natural rubber-latex. These sub-stances are harmful if swallowed.

• The contents of this bottle may causeallergic skin reactions or otherwise bepotentially harmful to the skin, the cen-tral nervous system, and the eyes.

Precautions:

• Keep out of reach of children.

• Do not ingest the contents.

• Avoid prolonged or repeated contactwith the skin.

• Hands should be washed thoroughlyafter handling.

First aid:

• Skin: Wash affected areas of skin withsoap and water. Get medical attentionif symptoms occur.

• Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least15 minutes, occasionally lifting theupper and lower eyelids. Get medicalattention if symptoms occur.

• Inhalation: Move the person to fresh air.If irritation persists, get medical atten-tion.

Tire sealing system–temporarilyrepairing a flat tire

G019723

Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in twostages:

• Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumpingsealing compound into the tire. The car isthen driven a short distance to distributethe sealing compound in the tire.

NOTE

Do not remove any foreign objects (nails,etc.) from the tire before using the sealingsystem.

• Stage 2: The tire’s inflation pressure ischecked and adjusted if necessary.

WARNING

• Never leave the tire sealing systemunattended when it is operating.

• Keep the tire sealing system away fromchildren.

• Be sure the vehicle is parked safely offthe road and away from moving traffic.

• Apply the parking brake.

Stage 1: Sealing the hole

1. Open the cover on the tire sealing kit.

2. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix itto the steering wheel hub where it will beclearly visible to the driver.

3. Ensure that the on/off switch is in position0 (the 0 side of the switch should bepressed down).

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

07

186

4. Put on the gloves included in the tire seal-ing system.

WARNING

Contact with the sealing compound maycause skin irritation. If contact occurs, washthe affected area immediately with soap andwater.

5. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottleholder and unscrew the cap on the bottleof sealing compound.

NOTE

Do not break the seal on the bottle. Thisoccurs automatically when the bottle isscrewed into the holder.

6. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder.

WARNING

The bottle is equipped with a catch to keepit securely in place and help prevent sealingcompound leakage. Once in place, the bot-tle cannot be unscrewed. This must be doneby a trained and qualified Volvo servicetechnician.

7. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s infla-tion valve and screw the tire sealing sys-tem’s hose connector onto the valve astightly as possible by hand.

8. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest12-volt socket in the vehicle.

9. Start the vehicle’s engine.

10. Start the tire sealing system’s compressorby pressing the on/off switch to position I.

WARNING

• Never stand next to the tire being inflatedwhen the compressor is in operation.

• If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire,switch off the compressor immediately.

• If there is visible damage to the sidewallor the rim, the tire cannot be repaired.The vehicle should not be driven if thisoccurs. Contact a towing service orVolvo On Call Roadside Assistance ifapplicable.

NOTE

The air pressure gauge will temporarilyshow an increase in pressure to approxi-mately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing com-pound is being pumped into the tire. Thepressure should return to a normal levelafter approximately 30 seconds.

11. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire tobetween 22—44 psi (1.8—3.0 bar). Switchoff the compressor briefly to get a clearreading from the pressure gauge.

CAUTION

The compressor should not be used formore than 10 minutes at a time to avoidoverheating.

WARNING

If the pressure remains below 22 psi(1.8 bar) after approximately seven minutes,turn off the compressor. In this case, thehole is too large to be sealed and the vehicleshould not be driven.

12. Switch off the compressor and disconnectthe electrical wire from the 12-volt socket.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

07

��

187

13. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflationvalve and reinstall the valve cap.

14. Immediately drive the vehicle for approxi-mately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum speedof 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute the seal-ing compound in the tire.

CAUTION

If your vehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS), theuse of the sealing compound may lead toincorrect tire pressure readings or in rarecases, damage to the tire pressure sensor.Use the tire sealing system to check andadjust the damaged tire's inflation pressure.

NOTE

• Safely stow the tire sealing system in aconvenient place as it will soon be usedagain to check the tire’s inflation pres-sure.

• The empty bottle of sealing compoundcannot be removed from the bottleholder. Consult a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician to have thebottle removed and properly disposedof.

WARNING

If heavy vibrations, unsteady steeringbehavior, or noises should occur while driv-ing, reduce speed and park the vehicle in asafe place. Recheck the tire for bumps,cracks, or other visible damage, andrecheck its inflation pressure. If the pressureis below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not continuedriving. Have the vehicle towed to a trainedand qualified Volvo service technician.

Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure

1. Connect the tire sealing system as descri-bed in stage 1.

2. Refer to the inflation pressure tables for thecorrect inflation pressure. If the tire needsto be inflated, start the tire sealing system’scompressor. If necessary, release air fromthe tire by turning the air release knobcounterclockwise.

CAUTION


WARNING

If you interrupt your trip for more than 1hour, check the inflation pressure in thedamaged tire again before continuing.

Replacing the sealing compound

container

The sealing compound container must bereplaced if:

• the tire sealing system has been used torepair a tire

• the container’s expiration date has passed(see the date on decal).

NOTE

• After use, the sealing compound bottle,the hose, and certain other systemcomponents must be replaced. Pleaseconsult your Volvo retailer for replace-ment parts.

• If the sealing compound bottle’s expi-ration date has passed, please take it toa Volvo retailer or a recycling stationthat can properly dispose of harmfulsubstances.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

07

188

Inflating tires

The tire sealing system can be used to inflatethe tires. To do so:

1. Park the car in a safe place.

2. The compressor should be switched off.Ensure that the on/off switch is in position0 (the 0 side of the switch should bepressed down).

3. Take out the electrical wire and hose.

4. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s infla-tion valve and screw the hose connectoronto the valve as tightly as possible byhand.

5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest12-volt socket in the vehicle.

6. Start the vehicle’s engine.

WARNING

• The vehicle’s engine should be runningwhen the tire sealing system is used toavoid battery drain. Therefore, be surethe vehicle is parked in a well ventilatedplace, or outdoors, before using the sys-tem.

• Children should never be left unattendedin the vehicle when the engine is running.

7. Check the tire’s inflation pressure on thegauge. Switch off the compressor briefly toget a clear reading from the pressuregauge.

8. Refer to the tire inflation tables for the cor-rect inflation pressure. If the tire needs tobe inflated, start the tire sealing system’scompressor (press the on/off switch toposition I). If necessary, release air from thetire by turning the air release knob coun-terclockwise.

CAUTION


9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/offswitch to position 0) when the correct infla-tion pressure has been reached.

10. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflationvalve and reinstall the valve cap.

11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the 12-volt socket.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – U.S. models only

07

��

189

The tire pressure monitoring system uses sen-sors mounted in the tire valves to check infla-tion pressure levels. When the vehicle is mov-ing at a speed of approximately 20 mph(30 km/h) or faster, these sensors transmitinflation pressure data to a receiver located inthe vehicle.

USA – FCC ID: MRXG403MA4A

This device complies with part 15 of the FCCrules. Operation is subject to the followingconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received,including interference that may cause unde-sired operation.

When low inflation pressure is detected,TPMS will light up the tire pressure warninglight (also referred to as a telltale) in theinstrument panel (see page 57), and will dis-play a message in the text window. Thewording of this message is determined bythe degree of inflation pressure loss.

A On certain models, the FCC code is MRXTG315AM04

When low inflation pressure is detected, TPMSwill light up the tire pressure warning light (also referred to as a telltale) in the instrumentpanel and will display one of the following mes-

sages in the text window: LOW TIRE PRESS.

CHECK TIRES or VERY LOW TIRE

PRESSURE.

NOTE

If a fault occurs in TPMS, the tire pressurewarning light will flash for approximately1 minute and TIRE PRESS SYSTSERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold andinflated to the inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label. (If yourvehicle has tires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label, you should determine theproper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with a tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. Accordingly, whenthe low tire pressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to the proper pres-sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflatedtire causes the tire to overheat and can lead totire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel

efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitutefor proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-er's responsibility to maintain correct tire pres-sure, even if under-inflation has not reachedthe level to trigger illumination of the TPMS lowtire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. TheTPMS malfunction indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale. When the systemdetects a malfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and then remaincontinuously illuminated. This sequence willcontinue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists. When the mal-function indicator is illuminated, the systemmay not be able to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions mayoccur for a variety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMSfrom functioning properly. Always check theTPMS malfunction telltale after replacing oneor more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate tiresand wheels allow the TPMS to continue tofunction properly.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – U.S. models only

07

190

NOTE

TPMS indicates low tire pressure but doesnot replace normal tire maintenance. Forinformation on correct tire pressure, pleaserefer to the Tire inflation pressure tables orconsult your Volvo retailer.

Erasing warning messages

When a low tire pressure warning message hasbeen displayed, and the tire pressure warninglight has come on:

1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check theinflation pressure of all four tires.

2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pressure(consult the tire pressure placard or thetable see page 171).

3. Drive the vehicle for several minutes at aspeed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster.> This will erase the warning text and the

warning light will go out.

WARNING

Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tirefailure, resulting in a loss of control of thevehicle.

Changing wheels with TPMS

Please note the following when changing orreplacing the factory installed TPMS wheels/tires on the vehicle:

• Only the factory-mounted wheels areequipped with TPMS sensors in the valves.

• If the vehicle is equipped with a temporaryspare tire, this tire does not have a TPMSsensor.

• If wheels without TPMS sensors are moun-ted on the vehicle, TIRE PRESS SYST

SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayedeach time the vehicle is driven above25 mph (40 km/h) for 10 minutes or more.

• Once TPMS sensors are properly installed,the warning message should not reappear.

• Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors befitted on all wheels used on the vehicle.Volvo does not recommend moving sen-sors back and forth between sets ofwheels.

NOTE

If a tire is changed or if the TPMS sensor ismoved to another wheel, the sensor’s seal,nut and valve core should be replaced.

CAUTION

When inflating tires with TPMS valves, pressthe pump's mouthpiece straight onto thevalve to help avoid bending or otherwisedamaging the valve.

07 Wheels and tires

07

191

G020920

192

Washing and cleaning the vehicle........................................................ 194Paint touch up....................................................................................... 198

08CAR CARE

08 Car care

Washing and cleaning the vehicle

08

194

Washing

• The vehicle should be washed at regularintervals since dirt, dust, insects and tarspots adhere to the paint and may causedamage. It is particularly important to washthe vehicle frequently in the wintertime toprevent corrosion, when salt has beenused on the roads.

• When washing the vehicle, do not exposeit to direct sunlight. Use lukewarm water tosoften the dirt before you wash with asponge, and plenty of water, to avoidscratching.

• Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork assoon as possible. Otherwise the finish maybe permanently damaged.

• A detergent can be used to facilitate thesoftening of dirt and oil.

CAUTION

Chromed wheels: Clean chrome-platedwheels using the same detergents used forthe body of the vehicle. Aggressive wheelcleaning agents can permanently stainchrome-plated wheels.

• Dry the vehicle with a clean chamois andremember to clean the drain holes in thedoors and rocker panels.

• Tar spots can be removed with tar removerafter the vehicle has been washed.

• A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapywater can be used to clean the wiperblades. Frequent cleaning of the wind-shield and wiper blades improves visibilityconsiderably and also helps prolong theservice life of the wiper blades.

• Wash off the dirt from the underside (wheelhousings, fenders, etc.).

• In areas of high industrial fallout, more fre-quent washing is recommended.

Suitable detergents

Special vehicle washing detergents should beused. A suitable mixture is about 2.5 fl. oz.(8.5 cl) of detergent to 2.6 US gal. (10 liters) ofwarm water. After washing with a detergent thevehicle should be well rinsed with clean water.

CAUTION

• Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rub-ber components

• Polishing chromed strips can wearaway or damage the surface

• Polishes containing abrasive sub-stances should not be used

CAUTION

• Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights canreduce lighting capacity considerably.Clean the headlights regularly, forexample when refueling.

• During high pressure washing, thespray mouthpiece must never be closerto the vehicle than 13 " (30 cm). Do notspray into the locks.

Special moonroof cautions:

• Always close the moonroof and sunshade before washing your vehicle.

• Never use abrasive cleaning agents onthe moonroof.

• Never use wax on the rubber sealsaround the moonroof.

Exterior components

Volvo recommends the use of special cleaningproducts, available at your Volvo retailer, forcleaning colored plastic, rubber, or ornamentalcomponents such as chromed strips on theexterior of your vehicle. The instructions forusing these products should be followed care-fully. Solvents or stain removers should not beused.

08 Car care


08

��

195

CAUTION

• Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rub-ber components

• Polishing chromed strips can wearaway or damage the surface

• Polishes containing abrasive sub-stances should not be used

NOTE

When washing the vehicle, remember toremove dirt from the drain holes in the doorsand sills.

WARNING

• When the vehicle is driven immediatelyafter being washed, apply the brakesseveral times in order to remove anymoisture from the brake linings.

• Engine cleaning agents should not beused when the engine is warm. Thisconstitutes a fire risk.

Automatic washing – simple and quick

• We do NOT recommend washing yourvehicle in an automatic wash during the

first six months (because the paint will nothave hardened sufficiently).

• An automatic wash is a simple and quickway to clean your vehicle, but it is worthremembering that it may not be as thor-ough as when you yourself go over thevehicle with sponge and water. Keepingthe underbody clean is most important,especially in the winter. Some automaticwashers do not have facilities for washingthe underbody.

• Before driving into an automatic car wash,make sure that side view mirrors, auxiliarylamps, etc, are secure, and that anyantenna(s) are retracted or removed. Oth-erwise there is risk of the machine dislodg-ing them.

Exterior lighting

Condensation may form temporarily on theinside of the lenses of exterior lights such asheadlights, fog lights, or tail lights. This is nor-mal and the lights are designed to withstandmoisture. Normally, condensation will dissi-pate after the lights have been on for a shorttime.

Polishing and waxing

• Normally, polishing is not required duringthe first year after delivery, however, wax-ing may be beneficial.

• Before applying polish or wax the vehiclemust be washed and dried. Tar spots canbe removed with kerosene or tar remover.Difficult spots may require a fine rubbingcompound.

• After polishing use liquid or paste wax.

• Several commercially available productscontain both polish and wax.

• Waxing alone does not substitute for pol-ishing a dull surface.

• A wide range of polymer-based car waxescan be purchased today. These waxes areeasy to use and produce a long-lasting,high-gloss finish that protects the body-work against oxidation, road dirt and fad-ing.

• Do not polish or wax your vehicle in directsunlight (the surface of the vehicle shouldnot be warmer than 113° F (45° C).

08 Car care


08

196

CAUTION

Volvo does not recommend the use of long-life or durable paint protection coatings,some of which may claim to prevent pitting,fading, oxidation, etc. These coatings havenot been tested by Volvo for compatibilitywith your vehicle's clear coat. Some of themmay cause the clear coat to soften, crack,or cloud. Damage caused by application ofpaint protection coatings may not be cov-ered under your vehicle's paint warranty.

Mirrors with the water repellent glasscoating

• Do not apply wax, degreasing agents, etcto this glass. This could damage the coa-ting.

• Clean the glass surface with care to avoidscratching.

NOTE

The water repellent coating is subject tonatural wear

• In order to maintain the coating's waterrepellent characteristics, it should be trea-

ted with a special compound that is avail-able at your Volvo retailer.

• This treatment should be carried out for thefirst time after three years, and thereafteronce a year.

Cleaning the upholstery

Fabric

Clean with soapy water or a detergent. Formore difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream,shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/fabricstain remover. Consult your Volvo retailer.

Interior plastic components

Cleaning interior plastic components shouldbe done with a cleaning agent speciallydesigned for this purpose. Consult your Volvoretailer.

Alcantera™ suede-like material

Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with asoft cloth and mild soap solution.

Leather care

Volvo's leather upholstery is manufacturedwith a protectant to repel soiling. Over time,sunlight, grease and dirt can break down theprotection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, andfading can result.

Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasyleather care kit formulated to clean and beau-

tify your vehicle's leather, and to renew theprotective qualities of its finish. The cleanerremoves dirt and oil buildup. The light creamprotectant restores a barrier against soil andsunlight.

Volvo also offers a special leather softener thatshould be applied after the cleaner and pro-tectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, andreduces friction between leather and other fin-ishes in the vehicle.

Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting andconditioning your vehicle's leather two to fourtimes a year. Ask your Volvo retailer aboutLeather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Soft-ener 943 7429.

Cleaning leather upholstery

1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp spongeand squeeze it until the cleaner foams.

2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving thesponge with circular movements.

3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with thesponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain,do not rub.

4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or atowel, and allow the leather to dry com-pletely.

08 Car care


08

197

Protecting leather upholstery

1. Put a small amount of protectant cream ona cloth and apply a thin coating of creamto the upholstery with light circular move-ments.

2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes.

This will help the leather resist staining andprotect against sunlight's harmful UV rays.

CAUTION

• Under no circumstances should gaso-line, naphtha or similar cleaning agentsbe used on the plastic or the leathersince these can cause damage.

• Take extra care when removing stainssuch as ink or lipstick since the coloringcan spread.

• Use solvents sparingly. Too much sol-vent can damage the seat padding.

• Start from the outside of the stain andwork toward the center.

• Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in apocket) or velcro fasteners on clothingmay damage the textile upholstery.

• Clothing that is not colorfast, such asnew jeans or suede garments, may stainthe upholstery.

Cleaning the seat belts

Clean only with lukewarm water and a mildsoap solution.

Cleaning floor mats

The floor mats should be vacuumed or brushedclean regularly, especially during winter whenthey should be taken out for drying. Spots ontextile mats can be removed with a mild deter-gent.

08 Car care

Paint touch up

08

198

G031024

Model plate with paint color code (1).1

Paint damage requires immediate attention toavoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the finishregularly – when washing the vehicle forinstance. Touch-up if necessary.

Paint repairs require special equipment andskill. Contact a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician for any extensive damage.

Minor scratches can be repaired by usingVolvo touch-up paint.

Color code

Make sure you have the right color. The colorcode number is on the model plate in theengine compartment.

Minor stone chips and scratches

Material:

• Primer – can

• Paint – touch-up pen

• Brush

• Masking tape

• If the stone chip has not gone down to thebare metal and an undamaged color coatremains, you can add paint immediatelyafter removing dirt.

NOTE

When touching up the vehicle, it should beclean and dry. The surface temperatureshould be above 60° F (15° C).

Minor scratches on the surface

If the stone chip has not penetrated down tothe metal and an undamaged layer of paintremains, the touch-up paint can be applied assoon as the spot has been cleaned.

G020345

Deep scratches

• Place a strip of masking tape over the dam-aged surface. Pull the tape off so that anyloose flakes of paint adhere to it.

• Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it witha small brush. When the primer surface isdry, the paint can be applied using a brush.Mix the paint thoroughly; apply several thinpaint coats and let dry after each applica-tion.

If there is a longer scratch, you may want toprotect surrounding paint by masking it off.

1 The model plate is located on the passenger's side center door pillar.

08 Car care

08

199

G020922

200

Volvo service......................................................................................... 202Maintaining your vehicle....................................................................... 203Working on your vehicle........................................................................ 205Engine compartment............................................................................. 207Engine oil............................................................................................... 208Fluids..................................................................................................... 211Wiper blades......................................................................................... 213Battery................................................................................................... 214Replacing bulbs.................................................................................... 217Fuses..................................................................................................... 224

09MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING


Volvo service 09

202

Maintenance service

Periodic maintenance will help keep your vehi-cle running well. Your Warranty and ServiceRecords Information booklet provides a com-prehensive maintenance schedule up to150,000 miles (240,000 km) of vehicle service.This maintenance program contains inspec-tions and services necessary for the properfunction of your vehicle, and includes compo-nents that affect vehicle emissions. The main-tenance services contain several checks thatrequire special instruments and tools andtherefore must be performed by a qualifiedtechnician. Volvo advises you to follow theservice program outlined in this booklet. Tokeep your Volvo in top condition, specify time-tested and proven Genuine Volvo Parts andAccessories.

The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S.

The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehiclemanufacturers to furnish written instructions tothe ultimate purchaser to assure the properservicing and function of the components thatcontrol emissions. These services, which arelisted in the "Warranty and Service RecordsInformation booklet," are not covered by thewarranty. You will be required to pay for laborand material used.

Maintenance services

Your Volvo passed several major inspectionsbefore it was delivered to you, in accordancewith Volvo specifications. The maintenanceservices outlined in the Warranty and ServiceRecords Information booklet, many of whichwill positively affect your vehicle's emissions,should be performed as indicated. It is recom-mended that receipts for vehicle emissionservices be retained in case questions ariseconcerning maintenance.

Inspection and service should also be per-formed anytime a malfunction is observed orsuspected.

Vehicle Event Data (Black Box)

Your vehicle's driving and safety systemsemploy computers that monitor, and sharewith each other, information about your vehi-cle's operation. One or more of these comput-ers may store what they monitor, either duringnormal vehicle operation or in a crash or near-crash event. Stored information may be readand used by:

• Volvo Car Corporation

• service and repair facilities

• law enforcement or government agencies

• others who may assert a legal right toknow, or who obtain your consent to knowsuch information.

Applicable warranties

In accordance with applicable U.S. and Cana-dian regulations, the following list of warrantiesis provided.

• New Car Limited Warranty

• Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty

• Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty

• Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint Sys-tems Limited Warranty

• Emission Design and Defect Warranty

• Emission Performance Warranty

These are the Federal warranties; other war-ranties are provided as required by state/pro-vincial law. Refer to your separate Warrantyand Service Records Information booklet fordetailed information concerning each of thewarranties.


Maintaining your vehicle 09

��

203

Owner maintenance

Periodic maintenance requirements and inter-vals are described in your vehicle's Warrantyand Service Records Information booklet.

The following points can be carried outbetween the normally scheduled maintenanceservices.

Each time the vehicle is refueled

• Check the engine oil level

• Clean the windshield, windshield wipers,headlights, and tail lights

Monthly

• Check cold tire pressure in all tires. Inspectthe tires for wear.

• Check that engine coolant and other fluidlevels are between theindicated "min" and "max" markings.

• Clean interior glass surfaces with a glasscleaner and soft paper towels.

• Wipe driver information displays with a softcloth.

• Visually inspect battery terminals for cor-rosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose ter-minal connector, or a battery near the endof its useful service life. Consult a trainedand qualified Volvo service technician foradditional information.

As needed

• Wash the vehicle, including the undercar-riage, to reduce wear that can be causedby a buildup of dirt, and corrosion that canbe caused by salt residues.

• Clean leaves and twigs from air intakevents at the base of the windshield, andfrom other places where they may collect.

• Complete service information for qualifiedtechnicians is available online for purchaseor subscription at www.volvote-chinfo.com.

Emission inspection readiness

What is an Onboard Diagnostic System

(OBD II)?

OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerizedengine management system. It stores diagnos-tic information about your vehicle's emissioncontrols. It can light the Check Engine light(MIL) if it detects an emission control "fault." A"fault" is a component or system that is notperforming within an expected range. A faultmay be permanent or temporary. OBD II willstore a message about any fault.

How do states use OBD II for emission

inspections?

Many states connect a computer directly to avehicle's OBD II system. The inspector canthen read "faults." In some states, this type of

inspection has replaced the tailpipe emissiontest.

How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission

inspection?

Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspec-tion for any of the following reasons.

• If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, yourvehicle may fail inspection.

• If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit,but went out without any action on yourpart, OBD II will still have a recorded fault.Your vehicle may pass or fail, dependingon the inspection practices in your area.

• If you had recent service that required dis-connecting the battery, OBD II diagnosticinformation may be incomplete and "notready" for inspection. A vehicle that is notready may fail inspection.

How can I prepare for my next OBD II

emission inspection?

• If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – orwas lit but went out without service, haveyour vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary,serviced by a qualified Volvo technician.

• If you recently had service for a lit CheckEngine light, or if you had service thatrequired disconnecting the battery, aperiod of driving is necessary to bring theOBD II system to "ready" for inspection. Ahalf-hour trip of mixed stop-and-go/high-


Maintaining your vehicle 09

204

way driving is typically needed to allowOBD II to reach readiness. Your Volvoretailer can provide you with more infor-mation on planning a trip.

• Maintain your vehicle in accordance withyour vehicle's maintenance schedule.


Working on your vehicle 09

��

205

Note the following before you begin working

on your vehicle:

Battery

• Ensure that the battery cables are correctlyconnected and tightened.

• Never disconnect the battery when theengine is running (e.g., when replacing thebattery).

• Never use a fast charger to charge the bat-tery. The battery cables should be discon-nected when recharging.

• The battery contains acid that is both cor-rosive and poisonous. It is important thatthe battery is handled in an environmen-tally friendly way. See page 214 for moreinformation on handling the battery.

Hoisting the vehicle

G027001

If a garage jack is used to lift the vehicle, thetwo jack attachments points should be used.They are specially reinforced to bear the weightof the vehicle (see the illustration). A garagejack can also be placed under the front of theengine support frame. Take care not to dam-age the splash guard under the engine. Ensurethat the jack is positioned so that the vehiclecannot slide off it. Always use axle stands orsimilar structures. The vehicle's gross vehicleweight is between 5770 lbs (2630 kg) and6080 lbs (2760 kg). Use a jack and stands ratedfor this weight.

If a two-post hoist is used to lift the vehicle, thefront and rear lift arm pads should be centeredunder the reinforced lift plates on the inboardedge of the sill rail (see illustration).

WARNING

The ignition system has very high voltage!

The voltage in the ignition system is dan-gerous!

Do not touch spark plugs, ignition cables orthe ignition coil when the engine is runningor the ignition is switched on!

The ignition should be switched off when:

• Conducting engine tests.

• Replacing parts in the ignition system,such as spark plugs, ignition coil, dis-tributor, ignition cables, etc.

WARNING

Never try to repair any part of the SRS/SIPS/WHIPS/IC systems yourself. Anyinterference in the system could cause mal-function and serious injury. Any work shouldonly be performed by an authorized Volvoworkshop.


Working on your vehicle 09

206

Belt check

Check the belt regularly to make sure it is ingood condition and is clean. A worn or dirty beltcan cause poor cooling and low alternator out-put as well as impair the operation of the powersteering and the air conditioning unit.

NOTE

The drive belt is equipped with a self-ten-sioning mechanism and requires no adjust-ment between changes.

WARNING

The engine must not be running when thischeck is performed.

Check coolant level

The cooling system must be filled with coolantand not leak to operate at maximum efficiency.Check the coolant level regularly. The levelshould be between the MAX and MIN markson the expansion tank. The check should bemade with particular thoroughness when theengine is new or when the cooling system hasbeen drained.

Do not remove the filler cap other than for top-ping up with coolant. Frequent removal mayprevent coolant circulation between the engine

and the expansion tank during engine warm upand cooling.

Changing coolant

Normally, the coolant does not need to bechanged. If the system must be drained, con-sult a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-nician.

Do not top off with water only. This reduces therust-protective and antifreeze qualities of thecoolant and has a lower boiling point. It canalso cause damage to the cooling system if itshould freeze. Top off with Volvo GenuineCoolant/Antifreeze only (a 50/50 mix of waterand antifreeze.

CAUTION

The cooling system must always be keptfilled to the correct level. If it is not kept filled,there can be high local temperatures in theengine which could result in damage. Dif-ferent types of antifreeze/coolant may notbe mixed.

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap while theengine is warm. Wait until the vehicle cools.


Engine compartment 09

207

G027074

Brake fluid reservoir

Relay/fuse box

Air cleaner

Radiator

Dipstick-engine oil

Filler cap-engine oil

Washer fluid reservoir

Power steering fluid reservoir

Expansion tank-coolant

Data plate

Battery (under floor in rear cargo area)

WARNING

The cooling fan (located behind the radiator)may start or continue to operate (for up to6 minutes) after the engine has beenswitched off.


Engine oil 09

208

Oil specifications

Engine oil must meet the minimum ILSACspecification GF-4, API SL, or ACEA A1/B1.Lower quality oils may not offer the same fueleconomy, engine performance, or engine pro-tection.

Volvo recommends Castrol.

Depending on your driving habits, premium orsynthetic oils may provide superior fuel econ-omy and engine protection. Consult your Volvoretailer or a trained and qualified Volvo servicetechnician for recommendations on premiumor synthetic oils.

Oil additives must not be used.

NOTE

Synthetic oil is not used when the oil ischanged at the normal maintenance serv-ices. This oil is only used at customerrequest, at additional charge. Please con-sult a trained and qualified Volvo servicetechnician.

Oil viscosity

Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine lifeunder normal use. SAE 5W-30 will providegood fuel economy and engine protection. Seethe viscosity chart.

G02

3491

Viscosity chart

Extreme engine operation

Synthetic oils meeting SAE 0W-30 or 0W-40and complying with oil quality requirements arerecommended for driving in areas of sustainedtemperature extremes (hot or cold), when tow-ing a trailer over long distances, and for pro-longed driving in mountainous areas.

American Petroleum Institute (API)

symbol

G02

2917

American Petroleum Institute (API) symbol

The API Service Symbol "donut" is divided intothree parts:

• The upper section describes the oil's per-formance level.

• The center identifies the oil's viscosity.

• The lower section indicates whether the oilhas demonstrated energy-conservingproperties in a standard test in comparisonto a reference oil.


Engine oil 09

��

209

NOTE

Volvo uses different systems to indicate alow oil level or pressure. Some models havean oil pressure sensor, in which case awarning symbol (see page 56) is used toindicate low oil pressure. Other models havean oil level sensor, in which case the driveris alerted by the warning symbol in the cen-ter of the instrument panel and a text in theinformation display. Some models use bothsystems. Contact a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician for more informa-tion.

Changing engine oil and oil filter

See page 208 for oil specifications and page273 for oil volumes. Refer to the Warranty andService Records Information booklet for infor-mation on the oil change intervals.

NOTE

Volvo does not recommend the use of oiladditives.

Synthetic oil is not used when the oil ischanged at the normal maintenance inter-vals except at owner request and at addi-tional charge. Please consult a trained andqualified Volvo service technician.

Checking and adding oil

G030880

Location of dipstick (1) and oil filler cap (2)

The oil level should be checked every time thevehicle is refueled. This is especially importantduring the period up to the first scheduledmaintenance service.

• The vehicle should be parked on a levelsurface when the oil is checked.

• If the engine is warm, wait for at least10-15 minutes after the engine has beenswitched off before checking the oil.

Checking the oil

• Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a lint-free rag.

• Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and checkthe oil level.

• Add oil if necessary. If the level is close tothe MIN mark, add approximately1 US quart (1 liter) of oil.

• Run the engine until it reaches normaloperating temperature.

• Switch off the engine and wait for at least10-15 minutes and recheck the oil level. Ifnecessary, add oil until the level is near themark.

• Oil level should be between the MIN andMAX marks on the dipstick.


Engine oil 09

210

G030881

CAUTION

Not checking the oil level regularly can resultin serious engine damage if the oil levelbecomes too low.

• Never fill oil above the MAX mark. Thiscould cause an increase in oil consump-tion.

• Not checking the oil level regularly canresult in serious engine damage if the oillevel becomes too low.

• Always add oil of the same type andviscosity as already used.

WARNING

Do not allow oil to spill onto or come intocontact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.


Fluids 09

��

211


G027097


The washer fluid reservoir is located in theengine compartment and holds approx.6.8 US qts (6.5 liters).

When there is less than approximately 1 US qt(1 liter) remaining in the reservoir, the washerfluid spray will be directed to the windshieldonly.

During cold weather, the reservoir should befilled with windshield washer solvent contain-ing antifreeze.

Changing coolant

G027087

Coolant reservoir

Normally, the coolant does not need to bechanged. If the system must be drained, con-sult a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-nician.

CAUTION

• If necessary, top up the cooling systemwith Volvo Genuine Coolant/Antifreezeonly (a 50/50 mix of water and anti-freeze).

• Different types of antifreeze/coolantmay not be mixed.

• If the cooling system is drained, itshould be flushed with clean water orpremixed anti-freeze before it is refilledwith the correct mixture of water/anti-freeze.

• The cooling system must always bekept filled to the correct level, and thelevel must be between the MIN andMAX marks. If it is not kept filled, therecan be high local temperatures in theengine which could result in damage.Check coolant regularly!

• Do not top up with water only. Thisreduces the rust-protective and anti-freeze qualities of the coolant and has alower boiling point. It can also causedamage to the cooling system if itshould freeze.

• Do not use chlorinated tap water in thevehicles cooling system.


Fluids 09

212

WARNING

• Never remove the radiator cap while theengine is warm. Wait until the vehiclecools.

• If it is necessary to top up the coolantwhen the engine is warm, unscrew theexpansion tank cap slowly so that theoverpressure dissipates.

Brake fluid reservoirG000000

The brake fluid should always be above theMIN mark on the side of the reservoir. Check,without removing the cap, that there is suffi-cient fluid in the reservoir.

Fluid type: DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F(280 °C), P/N 9437433.

Replace: Every second year or 30,000 miles(48,000 km). The fluid should be replaced oncea year or every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) whendriving under extremely hard conditions(mountain driving, etc.).

Always entrust brake fluid changing to atrained and qualified Volvo service technician.

WARNING

• If the fluid level is below the MIN markin the reservoir or if a brake-relatedmessage is shown in the informationdisplay: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the cartowed to a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician and have the brakesystem inspected.

• Dot 4+ should never be mixed with anyother type of brake fluid.

Power steering fluid reservoir

FULL ADD

G026991

The fluid level should always be between theADD and FULL marks.

Fluid type: Volvo synthetic power steering fluid(Pentosin CHF 11S) P/N 1161529 or equiva-lent.

Replace: No fluid change required.

If a problem should occur in the power steeringsystem or if the vehicle has no electrical currentand must be towed, it is still possible to steerthe vehicle. However, keep in mind that greatereffort will be required to turn the steeringwheel.


Wiper blades 09

213

Windshield wiper blades To change a windshield wiper blade:

1. Fold the wiper arm out from the windshieldand hold the wiper blade.

2. Press in the grooved catches and pull outthe wiper blade.

3. Insert a new wiper blade and ensure that itis securely in place.

NOTE

The driver's side wiper blade is longer thanthe one on the passenger's side.

Tailgate wiper blade

G026959

To change a tailgate wiper blade:

1. Pull the wiper arm rearward, away from thetailgate window.

2. Pull out the wiper blade as shown in theillustration.

3. Press the new wiper blade into place.Check that it is properly secured.

NOTE

Keeping the windshield/tailgate windowand wiper blades clean helps improve visi-bility and prolongs the service life of thewiper blades, see page 194 for washinginstructions.


Battery 09

214

Battery maintenance

The battery in your vehicle is located under thefloor of the cargo compartment.

Driving habits and conditions, climate, thenumber of starts, etc. all affect the service lifeand function of the battery. In order for yourbattery to perform satisfactorily, keep the fol-lowing in mind:

• Use a screw driver to open the caps orcover and a flashlight to inspect the level.

• If necessary, add distilled water. The levelshould never be above the indicator.

• The fluid level should be checked if thebattery has been recharged.

• After inspection, be sure the cap over eachbattery cell or the cover is securely inplace.

• Check that the battery cables are correctlyconnected and properly tightened.

• Never disconnect the battery when theengine is running, or when the key is in theignition. This could damage the vehicle'selectrical system.

• The battery should be disconnected fromthe vehicle when a battery charger is useddirectly on the battery.

• To help keep the battery in good condition,the vehicle should be driven for at least 15

minutes a week or connected to a chargerwith an automatic charging function.

• If the battery is fully discharged a numberof times, this may shorten its service life.Keeping the battery fully charged helpsprolong its service life.

• The service life of a battery is affected byfactors such as driving conditions and cli-mate. Extreme cold may also furtherdecrease the battery’s starting capacity.

• Because the battery’s starting capacitydecreases with time, it may be necessaryto recharge it if the vehicle is not driven foran extended period of time or if the vehicleis usually only driven short distances.

•

WARNING



WARNING

• Never expose the battery to open flameor electric spark.

• Do not smoke near the battery.

• Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Donot allow battery fluid to contact eyes,skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If con-tact occurs, flush the affected areaimmediately with water. Obtain medicalhelp immediately if eyes are affected.

NOTE

Used batteries should be properly disposedof at a recycling station or similar facility, ortaken to your Volvo retailer.


Battery 09

��

215

Symbols

Wear protection goggles

See owner’s manual fordetails

Keep away from children

Corrosive

No smoking, no openflames, no sparks

Explosion

Replacing the battery

DRAIN PIPE

xxxx xxxxx xx xxxxxDISCONNECT

REMOVAL OF BATTERYO CABLE FIRST

xxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxx xx

+-

WARNING

xxxx xxxxx xx xxxxx

G027076


2. Wait at least 5 minutes after switching

off the ignition before disconnecting the

battery so that all information in the vehi-cle's electrical system can be stored in thecontrol modules.

3. Remove the retaining bracket and unscrewthe cover over the battery. Wait at least5 minutes after switching off the ignitionbefore disconnecting the battery so that allinformation in the vehicle's electrical sys-tem can be stored in the control modules.

4. Disconnect the negative (ground) cablefirst.

G027075


Battery 09

216

5. Disconnect the positive cable and pull theventilation hose from the battery.

6. Lift out the old battery and put a new bat-tery into place.

7. Connect the positive cable first.

8. Connect the negative (ground) cable.

9. Be sure that the ventilation hose (see rightcolumn) is securely connected to the bat-tery and that the other end of the hose isproperly routed through the ventilationopening in the floor of the battery compart-ment.

G030884

Ventilation hose

10. Reinstall the cover and retaining bracketand screw it securely in place.

NOTE

After the battery has been disconnected orreplaced, lock and unlock the vehicle withthe central locking system's remote key toreactivate such features as the power win-dows, moonroof, courtesy lighting, etc.

WARNING

• The battery generates hydrogen gas,which is flammable and explosive. Thebattery is fitted with a ventilation hosewhich vents hydrogen gas out of thebattery compartment through a ventila-tion opening in the bottom of this com-partment. If the battery must bereplaced, it is essential that the ventila-tion hose is properly connected to thebattery and that it is routed through theventilation opening provided (see illus-tration).

• Be sure the ventilation hose is free ofdebris.

• Only use replacement batteries equip-ped with a ventilation hose. Consult atrained and qualified Volvo service tech-nician.


Replacing bulbs 09

��


When replacing bulbs, keep the followingpoints in mind:

• Never touch the glass of bulbs with yourfingers. Grease and oils from your fingersvaporize in the heat and will leave a depositon the reflector, which will damage it.

• The optional Active Bending Light bulbscontain trace amounts of mercury. Thesebulbs should always be disposed of by anauthorized Volvo retailer.

The following bulbs should only be replaced bya trained and qualified Volvo service techni-cian:

• Active Bending Lights

• Courtesy (dome) lighting

• Reading lights

• Glove compartment lights

• Turn signals and courtesy lights in the sidedoor mirrors

• High-mounted brake lights

Replacing high/low beams/turn signal/parking light bulbs

WARNING

• The engine should not be running whenchanging bulbs.

• When changing in the headlight hous-ing, if the engine has been running justprior to replacing bulbs, please beaware that components in the enginecompartment will be hot.

G027081

The entire lamp housing must be lifted outwhen replacing these bulbs.

To lift out the lamp housing:


2. Open the hood.

3. Pull up the retaining pins (see the illustra-tion).

4. Lift out the lamp housing.

G027083

WARNING

Active Bending Lights* - due to the highvoltage used by these headlights, thesebulbs should only be replaced by a trainedand qualified Volvo service technician.


Replacing bulbs 09


Location of the bulbs in the headlighthousing

G027082

Low beam headlight/Active BendingLights*

High beam headlight

Turn signal

Parking light

Side marker light

Replacing the low beam bulb (Halogenheadlights)

G027088

1. Remove the plastic cover over the bulb byturning it counterclockwise.

2. Pull the connector from the lamp housing.

3. Loosen the bulb's retaining spring by firstmoving it to the right and then moving it outof the way.

4. Pull out the bulb from the holder.

5. Insert the new bulb (without touching theglass) in the holder.

6. Move the retaining spring up and push itslightly to the left until it seats properly.

7. Press the bulb holder into place on theheadlight housing.

8. Reinstall the plastic cap. The let-ters "HAUT" on the cap must be upward.

Replacing the high beam bulb (Halogenheadlights)

G027085

1. Remove the rubber cover by pulling it off.

2. Pull the connector from the lamp housing.

3. Loosen the bulb's retaining spring by firstmoving it to the right and then moving it outof the way.

4. Pull out the bulb from the holder.


Replacing bulbs 09

��

219

5. Insert the new bulb (without touching theglass) in the holder.

6. Move the retaining spring up and push itslightly to the left until it seats properly.

7. Press the bulb holder into place on theheadlight housing.

8. Press the rubber cover into place.

Replacing the high beam bulb (ActiveBending Lights)

G027090

1. Remove the rubber cover over the bulb bypulling it off.

2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise andpull it out of the headlight housing.

3. Remove the connector from the bulb unitby pressing the lock tab out and pulling.

4. Connect the connector to the new bulb unituntil it clicks into place.

5. Press a new bulb unit into the headlighthousing and turn it clockwise into place.

6. Reinstall the plastic cover.

Replacing parking light/side markerlight bulbs

G028409

1. Turn the lamp holder approximately 1/4turn counterclockwise and pull it out of theheadlight housing.

2. Pull the bulb straight out.

3. Align the guide lugs on the side of the baseof the new bulb in the grooves in the holderand press it into place.

4. Press the lamp holder into the place in theheadlight housing and turn it approxi-mately 1/4 turn clockwise.

Replacing the turn signal bulb

G027089

1. Turn the lamp holder approximately 1/4turn counterclockwise and pull it out of theheadlight housing.

2. Press in the bulb slightly and pull it out ofthe holder.


Replacing bulbs 09

220

3. Align the guide lugs on the side of the baseof the new bulb in the grooves in the holder.Press it in and turn it slightly clockwise.

4. Press the lamp holder into the place in theheadlight housing and turn it approxi-mately 1/4 turn clockwise.

Front fog lights

G027078

NOTE

Avoid touching the glass on the bulb withyour fingers.


2. Turn the bulb holder slightly counterclock-wise to release it.

3. Replace the bulb. The shape of the foot ofthe bulb corresponds to the shape of thebulb holder.

4. Reinstall the bulb holder by turning itslightly clockwise. The side of the holdermarked TOP should face upward.

Location of tail light bulbs

G027094

Parking light

Turn signal

Back-up light

Parking light

Brake light

NOTE

If the message indicating a burned out bulbremains in the information display after abulb has been replaced, consult a trainedand qualified Volvo service technician.


Replacing bulbs 09

��

221

Replacing bulbs in the taillight cluster

G027077

1. Switch off all lights and turn ignition key toposition 0.

2. Fold down the lower section of the tailgate,and fold up the rear section of the cargoarea floor.

3. If the vehicle is equipped with the optionalgrocery bag holder, detach the holder'sbands.

4. Remove the corner panel.

5. Open the cover in the side panel by pullingthe tab upward/outward.

6. Loosen the bolts.

7. Pull the entire tail light housing straight out.

8. Disconnect the wiring.

9. Place the tail light housing on a soft clothto avoid scratching the lens.

10. Turn the lamp holder(s) counterclockwiseand pull out.

11. Turn signal, back-up light, brake lightbulbs: Turn the bulb counterclockwise andremove it.

12. Parking light bulbs: Pull the bulb straightout.

13. Insert a new bulb.

14. Place the lamp holder in the groove andturn clockwise.

15. Press wiring back into place.

16. Align the tail light housing with the holes forthe retaining bolts and press it into place.

17. Tighten the retaining bolts.

18. Reinsert the side and corner panels.


Replacing bulbs 09

222

Rear fog light

G027093


2. Carefully insert a small screwdriver (seeillustration above).

3. Pry out the lamp housing.

4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise andremove it.

5. Turn the bulb counterclockwise andremove it.

6. Insert a new bulb and press the lamp hous-ing back into place.

Door step courtesy lights

G027079

The door step courtesy lights are located underthe dashboard on the driver's and passenger'ssides.

To replace a bulb:

1. Carefully insert a screwdriver and pry outthe lens.

2. Replace the defective bulb.

3. Reinstall the lens.

Cargo compartment light

G027084


2. Pry out the bulb and replace it.

3. Press the lens back into place.


Replacing bulbs 09

223

Vanity mirror lights

G027080


2. Pry out the bulb and replace it.

3. Carefully press the lower edge of lens ontothe four tabs and press the upper edge ofthe lens into place.

License plate lights

G030886


2. Loosen the screws with a Torx screw-driver.

3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise andpull it out.

4. Pull out the defective bulb and insert a newone.

5. Reinsert the bulb holder into the housingand turn it clockwise.

6. Reinstall the housing and screw it intoplace.

NOTE

Other bulbs may be difficult for you toreplace yourself. Let a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician replace thesebulbs if necessary.


Fuses 09


Replacing fuses

G03

2337

Relays/fuse box in the engine compart-ment

Fuse box in the passenger compartment,behind the plastic cover

Fuse box in the passenger compartment,on the edge of the dashboard

Fuse box in the cargo compartment

Fuse box in the cargo compartment1.

Additional fuses in cargo compartment(XC90 Executive*)

If an electrical component fails to function, it ispossible that a fuse has blown.

The fuse boxes are located in four differentplaces, see the illustration above.

A label on the inside of each cover indicates theamperage and the electrical components thatare connected to each fuse.

The easiest way to see if a fuse is blown is toremove it. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse isdifficult to remove, you will find a special fuseremoval tool (and several extra fuses) in thepassenger compartment fuse box on the driv-

er's end of dashboard. From the side, examinethe curved metal wire (see the illustration) tosee if it is broken. If so, put in a new fuse of thesame color and amperage (written on thefuse). Spare fuses are stored in the fuse box inthe engine compartment and the passengercompartment. If fuses burn out repeatedly,have the electrical system inspected by atrained and qualified Volvo service technician.

1 Certain markets only.


Fuses 09

��

225

WARNING

Never use metal objects or fuses with higheramperage than those stated on the follow-ing pages. Doing so could seriously damageor overload the vehicle's electrical system.


Fuses 09


Fuses in the engine compartment

G026972

When replacing fuses, be sure to replace ablown fuse with a new one of the same colorand amperage (written on the fuse).

No A

1 ABS 30

2 ABS 30

3 Headlight washers 35

4 – 20

5 Auxiliary lights* 35

No A

6 Starter motor relay 25

7 Windshield wipers 15

8 Fuel pump 15

9 Transmission control module(V8 and 6-cyl.)

15

10 Ignition coils, engine controlmodule

20

11 Throttle pedal sensor, A/Ccompressor, e-box fan

10

No A

12 Engine control module, fuelinjectors, mass airflow sensor

15

13 Throttle control (V8), Intakemanifold actuator (6-cyl.)

10

14 Heated oxygen sensor 20

15 Crankcase ventilation, sole-noid valves, A/C connection,leakage diagnostics, enginecontrol module (V8, 6-cyl.),mass airflow sensor (V8)

15


Fuses 09

��

227

No A

16 Driver's side low beam head-light

20

17 Passenger's side low beamheadlight

20

18 –

19 Engine control module feed,engine relay

5

20 Parking lights 15

21 Vacuum pump 20


Fuses 09


Fuses in the passenger compartment on the edge of the dashboard

G03

2316

The decal shows the positions and amperage of the fuses

Fuses are located inside the access panel onthe edge of the dashboard, on the driver's side.There are also a number of spare fuses. Whenreplacing a blown fuse, be sure to replace itwith a new one of the same color and amper-age (written on the fuse).

No A

1 Blower – climate system 30

2 Audio amplifier* 30

3 Power driver's seat* 25

No A

4 Power passenger's seat* 25

5 Driver's door – central lock-ing, power windows, doormirror

25

6 Front passenger's door – cen-tral locking, power windows,door mirror

25

7 –

8 Radio, CD player 15

No A

9 Volvo Navigation System*,Sirius satellite radio*, RearSeat Entertainment (RSE)*

10

10 On-board diagnostics, head-light switch, steering wheelangle sensor, steering wheelmodule

5


Fuses 09

��


No A

11 Ignition switch, SRS, enginecontrol module (V8, 6-cyl.)immobilizer, transmissioncontrol module (V8, 6-cyl.)

7.5

12 Ceiling lighting, upper elec-tronic control module

10

13 Moonroof* 15

– 14 – 38 -


Fuses 09


Fuse box in the passenger compartment, behind the plastic cover, driver's side

G028412

This fuse box is located behind the plasticcover below the steering wheel. When replac-ing a blown fuse, be sure to replace it with anew one of the same color and amperage (writ-ten on the fuse).

No A

1 Heated passenger's seat 15

2 Heated driver's seat 15

3 Horn 15

4 –

No A

5 Audio system 10

6 –

7 –

8 Alarm siren* 5

9 Break light switch feed 5

10 Instrument panel, climate sys-tem, power driver's seat,Occupant Weight Sensor

10

No A

11 12-volt sockets – front and rearseats, refrigerator* (XC90Executive)

15

12 –

13 –

14 –

15 ABS, DSTC 5

16 Power steering, Active Bend-ing Lights*

10


Fuses 09

��


No A

17 Driver's side front foglight* 7,5

18 Passenger's side front fog-light*

7,5

19 –

20 Coolant pump (V8) 5

21 Transmission control module1 10

22 Driver's side high beam1 10

23 Passenger's side high beam 10

24 –

25 –

26 –

27 –

28 Power passenger's seat* 5

29 –

30 Blind Spot Information Sys-tem*

5

31 –

32 –

No A

33 Vacuum pump 20

34 Pump – windshield and tail-gate washers

15

35 –

36 –


Fuses 09

232

Fuses in the cargo compartment

G03

2342

The fuses in the cargo area are located behindthe panel on the driver's side of the cargo com-partment. When replacing a blown fuse, besure to replace it with a new one of the samecolor and amperage (written on the fuse).

No A

1 Backup lights 10

2 Parking lights, foglights, cargocompartment lighting, licenseplate lights, brake light diodes

20

3 Accessories 15

No A

4 –

5 Rear Electronic module 10

6 Rear Seat Entertainment(accessory)

7,5

7 Rear Seat Entertainment(accessory)

15

8 12-volt socket in cargo com-partment

15

No A

9 Rear passenger's side door –power window, power windowcutout function

20

10 Rear driver's side door – powerwindow, power window cutoutfunction

20

11 –

12 –

13 –


Fuses 09

��


No A

14 Subwoofer*, rear air condition-ing system *

15

15 –

16 –

17 Accessory audio 5

18 –

19 Rear window wiper 15

20 Trailer wiring (15-feed)* 20

21 –

22 –

23 Park assist 7,5

24 –

25 –

26 Park assist* 5

27 Main fuse: trailer wiring, parkassist, All Wheel Drive

30

28 Central locking system 15

29 Driver's side trailer lighting:parking lights, turn signal*

25

No A

30 Passenger's side trailer light-ing: brake light, fog light, turnsignal*

25

31 Main fuse: fuses 37 and 38 40

32 –

33 –

34 –

35 –

36 –

37 Heated rear window 20

38 Heated rear window 20


Fuses 09


Additional fuses in the cargo compartment (XC90 Executive*)

G03

1532

The fuses in the cargo area are located behindthe panel on the driver's side of the cargo com-partment. When replacing a blown fuse, besure to replace it with a new one of the samecolor and amperage (written on the fuse).

1. Relays for rear seatheating and front seatmassage 5 A

2. Rear seat heating, driv-er's side 15 A

3. Rear seat heating, pas-senger's side 15 A

4. Front seat ventilation/massage 10 A

5. - -

6. - -


09

235

G020924


Audio system overview......................................................................... 238Audio system controls.......................................................................... 239Radio functions..................................................................................... 244Sirius satellite radio............................................................................... 249Auxiliary equipment............................................................................... 253CD player/changer................................................................................ 255Menu structure...................................................................................... 258Rear Seat Entertainment – Dual Screen (RSE)*.................................... 259

10AUDIO

10 Audio

Audio system overview

10


CD player

VOLUME – turn to adjust

POWER – On/Off

AM/FM – for switching between FM1,

FM2 and AM

Display

ENTER – select in the menu or activate aselection

Not in use

MY KEY – programmable key for yourfavorite function from the menu

SELECTOR – select sound source

SOUND – make sound settings

EXIT/CLEAR – step back in the menu orcancel a selection

Not in use

MENU – menu selections/navigation

CD eject

CD slot, CD changer*

search for and store the strongest radiostations in the area in which you are driving

Station preset buttons/selecct a disc in theCD changer* (1-6)

IR* Infrared port – for the optional naviga-tion system remote control

10 Audio

Audio system controls

10

��

239

Steering wheel keypad

G027135

The four buttons on the steering wheel keypadcan be used to control the audio system. Thesteering wheel keypad can be used to adjustvolume, shift between preset stations andchange CD tracks.

• Press the or buttons briefly tosearch for a radio station, or to go to thenext/previous track on a CD.

• Press and hold down these buttons tosearch within a track.

Accessing and using menus

G027112

In menu mode, you can change settings andprogram new functions in the audio system.The various menu alternatives are shown in thedisplay, and the current level in the menu struc-ture is shown at the upper right corner of thedisplay.

Press the MENU button to enter menu mode.

Use the menus as follows:

• Use the menu arrow keys to navigateup or down in the menus. Dots in the dis-play indicate that there are more menuselections from which to choose.

• Press ENTER to confirm or cancel a menuselection.

• One long press on EXIT/CLEAR exitsmenu mode.

• A short press on the EXIT/CLEAR enablesyou to cancel, undo, or answer no to amenu selection, or to go back in the menustructure.

Shortcut

The menu alternatives are numbered and canbe accessed directly by pressing the respec-tive keys on the numbered keypad on the leftside of the audio panel.

MY KEY – programming a shortcut

Use the MY KEY button to program a favoritefunction from the menu, such as RANDOM,etc.

1. Use the MENU buttons to scroll among thefunctions.

2. Select the desired function from the menuby pressing the MY KEY button for morethan two seconds.

3. When MY KEY STORED is shown in thedisplay, the function has been stored.

4. Activate the function by briefly pressing theMY KEY button.

Repeat steps 1 – 4 to store new functions onthe MY KEY buttons.

10 Audio


10


NOTE

The MY KEY buttons can only be pro-grammed for one shortcut function at atime.

Rear headphone connectors andcontrols *

G026982

The door panels behind the second row ofseats can be equipped with headphone con-nectors for passengers in the second andoptional third row of seats. Several people canlisten to different sound sources, such as CDsor the radio at the same time without disturbingeach other.

Two sets of headphones can be plugged intoeach connector.

1. With the audio system switched on, usethe SEL button to select a sound source.

2. Press the arrow keys briefly to change CDtracks or switch between preset stations.

3. Hold down the arrow keys to fast forward/reverse, or search for the previous/nextstrong radio station.

4. Hold down the SEL button to turn off thesound.

NOTE

For the best sound reproduction, we rec-ommend headphones with impedancebetween 16 – 32 ohm. The sensitivity ofthese should be equal to or greater than102 dB. The headphone connections areintended for 3.5 mm contacts and arelocated under the lower edge of the socket.

All headphones are automatically turned offwhen the ignition is switched off. They must bemanually restarted when the ignition isswitched on again.

Headphones – limitations

• The headphones will only work when theignition key is in position I or higher.

• If a set of headphones is connected to thesame source that is being sent through thespeakers, the headphone controls cannotbe used to change track or station. This isto prevent the driver from being distractedby an unexpected change in music.

• If the driver selects the same sound sourceas someone listening to this sourcethrough headphones, the driver takes con-trol of the sound source.

• Only one disc in the optional CD changer,and one track on the CD can be played ata time.

• Headphone users can choose from amongthe preset radio stations (AM, FM1, FM2)previously set by the driver.

• If FM is played in the speakers, AM is notavailable and vice versa.

10 Audio


10

��


On/Off button

G027146

To activate the system:

1. Turn the ignition key to position I.

NOTE

If you switch off the ignition while the audiosystem is on, the system will be on when theignition is switched on again.

2. Press the POWER button to switch theaudio system on or off.

Volume control

Turn the knob clockwise or counterclock-wise to raise or lower the volume. The volumecontrol is electronic and has no end position.Volume can also be raised (+) or lowered (–)using the steering wheel keypad.

Pause mode

If the volume is turned off, the CD player will gointo pause mode. Re-activate the player byturning up the volume.

Selecting a sound source

• Press AM/FM repeatedly to togglebetween FM1, FM2, and AM

• Press the CD button to change to theCD player or optional CD changer

• Turn the SELECTOR control to chooseFM1, FM2, AM, CD, CD changer*, AUX*, orthe optional Sirius satellite radio.

The selected sound source will be shown in thedisplay.

Sound settings

G027147

1. Press the SOUND button repeatedlyuntil you come to the setting that you wishto change. Choose BASS, TREBLE,

FADER, BALANCE, SUBWOOFER *,CENTER* or SURROUND*.

2. Use the SELECTOR control to adjustthe level of the setting you have selected.The display shows a scale from min. tomax. position. The center indicates thenormal position.

10 Audio


10


NOTE

Sound level for the center speaker can onlybe set if Dolby Pro Logic II (DPL II) or three-channel stereo (3-CH) is selected in themenu.

Sound level for the subwoofer can only be setif SUBWOOFER is selected in the menu (acti-vated).

Setting Shown in the dis-play

Bass BASS

Treble TREBLE

Balance betweenthe right and leftspeakers

BALANCE

Balance betweenthe front and rearspeakers

FADER

Bass speaker level SUBWOOFER*

Center speaker level CENTER (PremiumSound system only)

Surround soundlevel

SURROUND (Pre-mium Sound systemonly)

SURROUND MODE

Surround sound settings are used to balancesound levels throughout the vehicle. Surroundsettings for the various sound sources aremade separately.

There are three settings for surround sound.

• PRO LOGIC II

• 3-CHANNEL

• OFF (2-channel stereo)

The symbol in the display indicates thatDolby Surround Pro Logic II is activated.

• Dolby Surround Pro Logic II functions inCD mode only.

• 2-channel stereo is recommended for AM/FM radio broadcasts.

• Dolby Surround Pro Logic II is only availa-ble on the highest level audio system –Premium Sound.

Use the following instructions to select PROLOGIC II, 3-CHANNEL, or to turn these func-tions off. See also the menu structure on page258.

1. Select AUDIO SETTINGS in the menu andpress ENTER.

2. Select CD SURROUND and pressENTER.

3. Select PRO LOGIC II, 3-CHANNEL, orOFF and press ENTER.

4. The symbol PL II is displayed whenPro Logic II is selected.

5. 3-CH is displayed when 3-channel stereois selected.

6. OFF indicates normal stereo mode.

Dolby noise reduction is manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Cor-poration.

"Dolby Surround Pro Logic II", and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laborato-ries Licensing Corporation. Dolby SurroundPro Logic II is manufactured under licence fromDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

Bass speaker – SUBWOOFER*

The subwoofer helps the system provide fullersound and deeper bass.


2. Select SUBWOOFER and press ENTER.

See page 241 for information on setting thesubwoofer level.

Equalizer FR

EQ – FRONT (certain audio systems)

10 Audio


10

243

This function is used to fine-tune the soundfrom the front speakers.


2. Select Equalizer FR and press ENTER.

3. Use the menu selection buttons to set thelevel or use the SELECTOR control.

4. Press ENTER to select the next frequency.You can select five frequencies.

5. Press ENTER until you come to the menumode to save the changes you have made.

Equalizer RR

EQ – REAR (certain audio systems)

This function is used to fine-tune the soundfrom the rear speakers.


2. Select EQ- REAR and press ENTER.

3. Use the menu selection buttons to set thelevel or use the SELECTOR control.

4. Press ENTER to select the next frequency.You can select five frequencies

5. Press ENTER until you come to the menumode to save the changes you have made.

Optimal sound reproduction

The audio system is calibrated for optimalsound reproduction through the use of digitalsignal processing. This calibration takes intoaccount the speakers, amplifier, cabin acous-tics, the seating position of the listener, etc., foreach combination of vehicle and audio system.There is also dynamic calibration that takesinto account the setting of the volume control,radio reception, and the vehicle's speed. Thesound settings described in this manual, suchas BASS, TREBLE, and EQUALIZER are onlyintended to enable the user to adapt soundreproduction to his/her personal preferences.

10 Audio

Radio functions

10

244

Station search

G027148

1. Choose radio mode AM/FM1/FM2 usingthe SELECTOR control or the AM/FM

button .

2. Press briefly on or to searchfor the next strong station. The radio willsearch for the next audible station and thenstop.

3. Press one of the buttons again to start anew search.

Manually search for a known frequency

1. Press and hold the or button(or the corresponding buttons on the steer-

ing wheel keypad). MAN will be shown inthe display. The radio will slowly scroll inthe desired direction and then increasespeed after a few seconds.

2. Release the button when the desired fre-quency is displayed.

3. If you need to adjust the frequency, pressbriefly on or .

The manual search function is available for fiveseconds after you last pressed the button.

Storing stations

To store a selected station under one of thestation setting buttons 0 – 9 :

1. Set the desired station.

2. Press the button under which the station isto be stored and keep it depressed. Thesound will be interrupted for several sec-onds and STATION STORED is shown inthe display. The station is now stored.

You can store up to 10 stations each for AM,FM1 and FM2, i.e. a total of 30 stations.

Frequency ranges

Radio Frequency band

FM 87.7 – 107.9 MHz

AM 530 – 1710 kHz

Automatically storing stations –AUTOSTORE

G027149

This function automatically searches for, andstores up to 10 strong AM or FM stations in aseparate memory. If more than 10 stations arefound, the 10 strongest ones will be stored. Thefunction is especially useful in areas in whichyou are not acquainted with radio stations ortheir frequencies.

10 Audio

Radio functions

10

��

245

Starting autostore

1. Choose a frequency band with the AM/

FM button.

2. Press and hold down the AUTO button until AUTOSTORING is shown in the

display.

When AUTOSTORING is no longer displayed,the autostore process is complete. The auto-matically stored stations can be selected withethe preset (number) keys If there are no stationswith sufficient signal strength, NO AST

FOUND is displayed.

Stopping autostore

Press EXIT.

Selecting an autostored station

1. Press AUTO (1) briefly. AUTO will be dis-played.

2. Press one of the preset buttons (0 – 9).

The radio will remain in Autostore mode untilAUTO, EXIT, or AM/FM is pressed.

SCAN

This function automatically searches the cur-rently selected waveband (AM, FM1, or FM2)for strong stations. When the radio finds a sta-tion, it will pause for approximately 8 seconds,after which it will continue scanning.

Activating/deactivating Scan

1. Choose a waveband by pressing the AM/

FM button.

2. Press SCAN . SCAN will be shown in thedisplay.

3. Press EXIT to stop scanning.

Storing a station found by SCAN

Stations can be stored on the preset buttonswhile the SCAN function is activated.

• Press a preset button and hold it down untilStation stored is displayed.

This deactivates SCAN and the stored stationcan be selected by pressing the preset button.

Radio text

Certain stations broadcast program informa-tion, which can be shown in the display.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Select RADIOTEXT in the menu and pressENTER.

Select RADIOTEXT again to deactivate.

10 Audio

Radio functions

10

246

HD Radio reception (U.S.

models only)1

Introduction

Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radiobroadcast

HD radio is a brand name registered by theIbiquity digital corporation2. They are thedeveloper of a broadcasting technology calledIBOC or In Band On Channel, which refers tothe method of transmitting a digital radiobroadcast signal centered on the same fre-

quency as the AM or FM station's present fre-quency.

The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid"since it is both analogue and digital. Duringhybrid operation, receivers still continue toreceive the analogue (non-digital) signal. HDradio receivers incorporate both modes ofreception, where the receiver will automaticallyswitch to the analogue signal if the digital signalcannot be decoded or is lost by the receiver.When you have tuned to an HD Radio station,the symbol will appear in the audio sys-tem display.

More information about HD radio and IBOCcan be found on Ibiquity's website,www.hdradio.com and www.ibiquity.com.

Benefits of digital broadcasting

• Better sound (FM sounds near CD qualityand AM as analogue FM).

• Some FM frequencies offer a greater num-ber of listening choices through “multicast-ing” (consisting of a frequency's mainchannel and any sub-channels that mayalso be available on that particular fre-quency. See also the section "Sub-chan-nels" below).

• When receiving a digital signal there is nomultipath disturbance or hisses/pops/crackling due to outside influences.

How HD broadcasting works

HD Radio works similarly to conventional radioand broadcasts of this type are available inmany areas of the United States. However,there are a few key differences:

• Instead of transmitting one analogue sig-nal, stations send out a bundled signal –both analogue and digital.

• An HD radio receiver can receive both dig-ital and analogue broadcasts. Dependingon the terrain and location of the vehicle(which will influence the signal strength),the receiver will determine which signal toreceive.

Limitations

• Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM

only): The main channel is the only channelthat can receive in hybrid mode (both dig-ital and analogue). If a frequency has sub-channels, they are broadcast in digitalmode only. The main FM channel will bedisplayed as, for example, 93.9 WNYC(Volvo uses the symbol > to indicate thereare sub-channels available) The sub-FM

1 HD Radio(TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquityDigital Corp. HD Radio(TM) is only available in vehicles not equipped with the optional integrated CD changer.

2 HD Radio (TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquityDigital Corp.

10 Audio

Radio functions

10

��

247

channels will be displayed as 93.9 – 2WNYC, 93.9 - 3 WNYC, etc.

• Reception coverage area: Due to currentIBOC transmitter power limitations, thereception coverage area in digital mode issomewhat more limited than the station'sanalogue coverage area. Please be awarethat as with any radio broadcast technol-ogy, terrain, time of day, foliage level andbuilding location can have positive or neg-ative effects on radio reception.

• Analogue to digital/digital to analogue

blending: Analogue to digital blending willoccur as the signal strength reaches a pre-set threshold in the receiver. This will benoticeable in fringe areas (areas with weakreception) and is normal.

NOTE

There may be a noticeable difference insound quality when a change from analogueto digital or digital to analogue occurs, suchas:

• Volume increase or decrease

• Equalizer settings, i.e. Bass/ Midrange/Treble cut or boost

• Time alignment (Digital program mate-rial in extreme cases can be as much as8 seconds behind the analogue). Thiswill noticeable as a "stuttering" effect.

The above items are dependant on thebroadcaster's equipment settings and donot indicate a fault in the vehicle's radioreceiver or antenna systems.

Switching HD on or off

The factory setting for HD radio is on. However,when driving through areas with weak HD sig-nals (fringe areas), you may experience that theradio repeatedly switches between analogue/digital and digital/analogue reception. If thishappens, it may be desirable to switch HD off.To do so:

1. Be sure the audio system is switched onand in AM or FM mode.

2. Press MENU in the center console controlpanel.

3. Press ENTER to turn HD off (the X will dis-appear from the box on the display screen).

This will disable the radio's capability to receivedigital broadcasts but it will continue to func-tion as a conventional (analogue) AM/FMreceiver. Please note that when HD is switchedoff, it will not be possible to tune to sub-chan-nels (see the following section for a moredetailed explanation of sub-channels).

Repeat steps 2 and 3 above to reactivate HD(an X will appear in the box on the displayscreen).

Sub-channels

Example of an HD Radio station with sub-channels

10 Audio

Radio functions

10

248

In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FMwavebands only) will also have sub-channelsoffering additional types of programming ormusic.

In such cases, the “>” symbol will be displayedto the left of the frequency number and a num-ber will be displayed to the right of the fre-quency number indicating that the currentlytuned frequency has at least one sub-channel.The "2" in the illustration indicates that you arecurrently listening to the first sub-channel onfrequency 93.9.

Selecting sub-channels

To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), pressthe right arrow key on the center console or onthe steering wheel keypad. To go back to themain channel, press the left arrow key. To goto subchannel 2 (if available), press the rightarrow key.

If you are currently tuned to a frequency's mainchannel, pressing the left arrow key will tune tothe next lower radio frequency.

NOTE

• When the radio has gone into HD mode,it may take several seconds before the">" symbol (if the current frequency hasany sub-channels) is displayed to theright of the frequency. Pressing thearrow keys before the number is dis-played will cause the radio to tune to thenext available radio station, not to thecurrent station's sub-channels.

• When you are no longer in broadcastingrange of the currently tuned sub-chan-

nel, No HD reception will be dis-played. The radio will then be mutedand it will be necessary to tune to orsearch for a new radio station.

Sub-channels can also be stored as presets,see page 244 for information on storing sta-tions.

If you press a sub-channel's preset button, itmay take up to 6 seconds before the channelbecomes audible. If you press this button whileyou are out of digital range of the transmitter,No HD reception will be displayed.

10 Audio

Sirius satellite radio

10

��

249

Listening to satellite radio

The optional Sirius satellite system consists ofa number of high elevation satellites in geo-synchronous orbit.

NOTE

• The digital signals from the Sirius satel-lites are line-of-sight, which means thatphysical obstructions such as bridges,tunnels, etc, may temporarily interferewith signal reception.

• Avoid any obstructions, such as metal-lic objects transported on roof racks orin a ski box, or other antennas that mayimpede signals from the SIRIUS satel-lites.

Selecting Sirius radio mode

1. Press Power to switch on the audio sys-tem (see page 238 for information on thestandard radio functions).

2. Turn the SELECTOR dial until Sirius 1 or 2is displayed.

Activating Sirius radio

1. Tune to a satellite channel that has noaudio, which means that the channel isunsubscribed and the text "Call 888-539-

SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE" is displayed

(see also "Selecting a channel" in the rightcolumn).

2. Call Sirius at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474).

3. When asked for the Sirius ID number pressAUTO to display this number. It is alsopossible to retrieve the Sirius ID from theMENU.

4. "UPDATING SUBSCRIPTION" will bedisplayed while the subscription is beingupdated, after which the display will returnto the normal view.

SIRUS ID

The SIRIUS ID is required when contacting theSirius Call Center. It is used to activate youraccount and when making any account trans-actions. The SIRIUS ID is sometimes referredto as the Electronic Serial Number (ESN).

This function displays the 12-digit SIRIUS ID.

Selecting a channel category

1. Select Sirius radio mode as describedabove.

2. Press ENTER.

3. Use the up/down arrow keys to scrollthrough the list of categories.

4. Press ENTER to select a category.

5. Use the and buttons to selecta channel in the currently chosen category.

NOTE

The category "All" is default, which enablesyou to scroll through the entire list of avail-able satellite channels.

The channel categories are automaticallyupdated several times a year. This takesapproximately two minutes and will inter-rupt normal broadcasting. A message willbe displayed while updating is in progress.Information on channel or feature updates isavailable at www.sirius.com.

Selecting a channel

There are two ways of tuning in a channel:

• By pressing and holding the and buttons to start the scroll function.

The scrolling function begins slowly andincreases speed after approximately5 seconds. Release the button to listen tothe currently displayed channel.

• Through direct channel entry

Direct channel entry

The Sirius satellite channels are numberedconsecutively throughout all of the categories.To access a channel directly:

10 Audio


10

250

1. Press MENU and scroll to Direct channel

entry.

2. Use the numerical keypad to enter thechannel's number. Press EXIT if necessaryto erase a digit.

3. Press ENTER. The radio will tune to thischannel, even if it belongs to a categoryother than the currently selected one.

NOTE

The numbers of skipped or locked channelswill not be displayed.

• If a channel is locked, the access codemust be entered before the channel canbe selected. See "Unlocking a channel"on page 251.

Scanning

SCAN automatically searches through the listof satellite channels. see page 244 for moredetailed information.

Storing a channel

A total of 20 satellite channels can be stored;10 channels each for Sirius 1 and 2. See page244 for detailed information on storing chan-nels.

• A long press on one of the number keysstores the currently tuned channel on thatkey.

• A short press on a number key while theradio is in Sirius 1 or 2 mode will tune to thepreset satellite channel stored on that but-ton, regardless of the currently selectedchannel category.

Song Seek and Song Memory

The Song Seek and Song Memory functionsprovide both audio and visual notification whenSirius is broadcasting your favorite songs.Song Seek enables you to store the name ofthe song for future advance notification whenthat song is being played. The Song Memory

feature makes it possible to view all of the cur-rent songs that are stored in memory.

Song memory

Up to ten songs can be saved in the system'smemory.

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to "Add song to song mem." andfollow the instructions shown in the dis-play.

If a new song is selected when the memory isfull, you will be prompted to press ENTER todelete the last song on the list.

The remaining songs in the list will move downone position, and the newly added song will beplaced at the top of the list.

Song seek

When a satellite radio channel plays one of thesongs stored in the song memory, the listenerwill be alerted by a text message and an audi-ble signal.

Press ENTER to listen to the song or EXIT tocancel.

To activate/deactivate the song seek function:

1. Press MENU

2. Scroll to "Song seek"

3. Press ENTER to activate or deactivate thefunction.

NOTE

When the song has ended, the radio willremain tuned to the channel on which thesong was played.

10 Audio


10

��

251

Radio text

The text that is displayed about the song cur-rently playing can be changed. Use the AUTO

button to switch between Artist, Title, Com-poser, or to switch radio text off, or use themenu to display and select among these cate-gories.

Advanced settings

This menu function enables you to make set-tings on certain Sirius satellite radio functions.To access this menu:

1. Press MENU.

2. Select Adv. settings.

WARNING

Settings should be made when the vehicleis at a standstill.

The following settings can be made in the Sir-ius menu.

• Songs can be added to the song list

• Channel skip settings can be made

• Channel lock settings can be made

• The channel access code can be displayedor changed

• Your Sirius ID can be displayed

Skip options

This function is used to remove a channel fromthe list of available channels.

Skip current channel

1. Select CHANNEL SKIP LIST and pressENTER.

2. Select a category in the list and pressENTER.

3. Skip channels in the list presented bypressing ENTER.

Unskip all channels

This permanently removes all channels fromthe skip list and makes them available forselection.

Temp. unskip all ch.

This function will temporarily unskip all chan-nels and make them available for selection. Thechannels remain on the skip list and will againbe skipped the next time the ignition isswitched on.

Channel lock

Access to specific channels can be restricted(locked). A locked channel will not provideaudio, song titles, or artist information.

NOTE

All channels are initially unlocked at deliv-ery.

Locking a channel:

1. Select "Adv. settings" in the menu andselect LOCK OPTIONS and pressENTER.

2. Select CHANNEL LOCK LIST and pressENTER

3. Enter the channel access code1 and pressENTER.

4. Select a category in the list and pressENTER.

5. Lock channels in the list presented bypressing ENTER.

The channel is now locked and a checked boxwill be displayed to indicate this. It will be nec-essary to enter the channel access code. Seethe section "Unlocking a channel" in order tolisten to a locked channel.

Unlocking a channel

A channel's access code1 is required to unlocka channel.

1 The default code is 0000. If you have changed the code and forgotten it, see the section "If you have forgotten the access code."

10 Audio


10

252

Unlock all channels

This permanently removes all channels fromthe locked list and makes them available forselection.

Temp. unlock all ch.

This function will temporarily unlock all chan-nels and make them available for selection. Thechannels remain on the locked list and willagain be locked the next time the ignition isswitched on.

CHANGE CODE

This function makes it possible to change thechannel access code. The default code is0000.

To change the code:

1. Select CHANGE CODE and pressENTER.

2. Enter the current code and press ENTER.

3. Enter the new code and press ENTER.

4. Confirm the new code and press ENTER.

If an incorrect code is entered, thetext "Incorrect code!" is displayed.

If you have forgotten the access code

1. Select "SIRIUS ID" in the Sirius settingsmenu and press ENTER.

2. Press and hold the ENTER button for2 seconds.

The current code will be displayed.

Your Volvo retailer can also provide you withassistance.

10 Audio

Auxiliary equipment

10

��


G027029

Auxiliary connector

AUX*

The AUX (auxiliary) port can be used to con-nect a device such as an MP3 player.

Turn the SELECTOR control (see the illustra-tion on page 238) to choose AUX.

If the player is being charged through a 12-voltsocket while it is connect to the AUX port,sound quality may be impaired.

The volume of the external sound source AUX

may be different from the volume of the internalsound sources such as the CD player or theradio.

USB

USB connector in glove compartment

If you connect an iPod , MP3 player or a USBflash drive to the optional USB connector, thisdevice can be controlled using the vehicle'saudio controls.

NOTE

Be sure that the device and/or cable are inthe glove compartment before closing theglove compartment door.

1. Select USB with the SELECTOR button.> Connect device will be displayed.

2. Connect the iPod , MP3 player or USBflash drive to the USB connector (see theillustration).> The text Loading will be displayed while

the system loads the files (folder struc-ture) on the device. This may take ashort time.

When the information has been loaded, infor-mation about the tracks on the device will bedisplayed.

The / buttons can be used to fastforward/reverse or change tracks:

• Press briefly to change tracks.

• Press slightly longer to fast forward/reverse.

The arrow keys on the steering wheel keypadcan also be used in the same way.

NOTE

The system supports playback of files in themost common versions of formats such asmp3, wma, and wav. However, there may beversions of these formats that the systemdoes not support.

The system also supports a number ofiPod models produced in 2005 or later.iPod Shuffle is not supported.

10 Audio

Auxiliary equipment

10

254

USB flash drive

To simplify the use of a USB flash drive, it isadvisable to only store music files on the drive.It will take considerably longer for the systemto index the files on the drive if it contains any-thing other than compatible music files.

NOTE

The system supports removable media thatuses the USB 2.0 standard and the FAT32file system and can index up to 500 foldersand a maximum of 64,000 files. The devicemust have at least 256 Mb of memory.

Auxiliary sound level

G027150

If the external sound source's volume is toohigh, the quality of the sound may be impaired.

This can be prevented by adjusting the externalsound source's input volume.

1. While playing the radio or a CD, lower theaudio volume to about one-quarter.

2. Switch to AUX mode on the audio system.

3. Connect the headphone output from yourmusic player to the AUX input using a cablewith a stereo 3.5 mm miniplug at bothends.

4. Set your music player's headphone vol-ume to three-quarters using the player'svolume controls.

5. Select AUX VOLUME in the menu andpress ENTER.

6. Adjust the volume with SELECTOR orwith the up/down arrows and pressENTER.

7. If there is distortion, lower your music play-er's headphone volume until the distortiongoes away.

Finally, exit the menu and adjust the audio vol-ume to a comfortable level.

NOTE

This cannot be done with the steering wheelkeypad.

The cover over the cup holders should beopen when an auxiliary device is connected.

10 Audio

CD player/changer

10

��


G027151

Playing a CD

CD player

If a CD is in the slot and the audio system is inCD mode when it is switched on, the CD will beplayed automatically. Otherwise, to play a CD:

1. Insert a CD into the slot .

2. Select the CD mode using theSELECTOR control or the CD button

.

CD changer*

The CD changer can hold up to six discs.

If a CD position in the changer containing a discis selected, and the audio system is in CD

mode when it is switched on, the CD will playautomatically. Otherwise, to play a CD:

1. Select an empty position using the stationsetting buttons 1 – 6. INSERT DISC will bedisplayed. Be sure this text is displayedbefore inserting a disc. The numbers ofpositions already containing discs areshown in the display.

2. Insert a CD into the slot .

3. Select the CD mode using theSELECTOR control or the CD button

.

Ejecting CDs

CD player

Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

CD changer

Ejecting one disc

A short press on the EJECT button (3) willeject the CD that is currently playing.

NOTE

For reasons of traffic safety, the ejected CDmust be removed within 12 seconds or it willbe automatically drawn back into the slotand the CD player will enter pause mode.Press the CD button to restart the disc.

Ejecting all discs

A long press on the EJECT button startsthe EJECT ALL function.

The text EJECTING ALL will be displayed andthe entire magazine will be emptied disc bydisc.

Pause

To pause CD playback, turn the volume all theway down. "CD paused" will be displayed.This will not occur if someone in the rear seatis listening to the CD through the optionalheadphones.

Play will resume when the volume is turned upagain.

Audio files

In addition to playing normal music CDs, theCD player/changer can also play discs con-taining files in mp3 or wma format.

NOTE

Certain discs that are copy protected can-not be read by the player.

When a disc with audio files is inserted in theplayer, the player scans the disc's foldersbefore it begins playing the files. The length oftime that this takes depends on the quality ofthe disc.

10 Audio

CD player/changer

10

256

Navigating the disc and playing tracks

If a disc with audio files is in the CD player,press ENTER to display a list of folders on thedisc.

Use the up and down arrows to move amongthe folders on the disc. Audio files have the

symbol and folders containing these

files have the symbol.

Press ENTER to play a selected folder or a file.

When the music file has been played, theplayer will continue to play the rest of the filesin the current folder. When all of the files in thefolder have been played, the player will auto-matically go to the next folder and play the filesin it.

NOTE

Press or if the entire name ofthe current track does not fit in the display.

Changing tracks

CD player/CD changer

1. Briefly press or to go to thenext/previous track or file. The steeringwheel keypad can be used in the sameway.

2. Press and hold down or tosearch within a track/file. The search con-tinues as long as the buttons aredepressed. The steering wheel keypad canbe used in the same way.

SCAN

This function plays the first ten seconds ofeach track or file1.

1. Press SCAN to begin scanning the tracksor files on the currently selected CD.

2. Press EXIT/CLEAR or SCAN to interruptthe scan function and listen to an entiretrack or file.

Random play

CD player

This function plays the tracks or files on a CDin random order (shuffle).

If a normal music CD is being played

Select RANDOM in the menu and pressENTER.

If a CD with mp3 or wma files is being

played

Select DISC or FOLDER in the menu andpress ENTER.

CD changer

This function offers two alternatives for playingthe tracks on the disc(s) in the CD changer inrandom order (shuffle).

• SINGLE DISC (random order on the cur-rently selected disc)

• ALL DISCS (random order on all of theCDs in the changer)

If a normal music CD is being played

• Select RANDOM in the menu and pressENTER.

• Select SINGLE DISC or ALL DISCS andpress ENTER.

NOTE

Press to play the next randomly selectedtrack. This can only be done on the currentlyselected disc.

If a CD with mp3 or wma files is being

played

Select SINGLE DISC or FOLDER in the menuand press ENTER.

This function is deactivated when a new disc isselected.

1 CD changer: SCAN only functions on the currently selected disc.

10 Audio

CD player/changer

10

257

Disctext

Certain CDs contain information about thedisc, such as the titles of the tracks, etc. Thisinformation can be shown in the display byactivating the DISCTEXT function.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Select DISCTEXT in the menu and pressENTER.

3. Any information that may be stored on thedisc will be displayed.

To deactivate this function, select DISCTEXT

and press ENTER.

Compact disc care

• Do not put tape or labels on the disc itself.They could become stuck in the player.

• Use CD standard EN 60908 discs only.Discs not meeting this standard may causeproblems with system (poor sound). CDRdiscs can cause listening problems due tothe quality of the disc or recording equip-ment used.

• DualDisc: The audio side of a DualDisc(combined CD/DVD) does not meet CDspecifications and may not play in youraudio system.

• Keep the discs clean. Wipe them with asoft, clean, lint-free cloth, working from thecenter outwards. If necessary, dampen the

cloth with a neutral soap solution. Dry thor-oughly before using.

• Never use cleaning spray or antistatic liq-uid. Use only cleaners specifically made forCD's.

• Use discs of the correct size only (3.5"discs should never be used).

• Volvo does not recommend the use ofplastic outer rings on the disc.

• Condensation may occur on discs/opticalcomponents of the changer in cold winterweather. The disc can be dried with aclean, lint-free cloth. Optical componentsin the CD changer may, however, take upto one hour to dry off.

• Never attempt to play a disc which is dam-aged in any way.

• When not in use, the discs should bestored in their covers. Avoid storing discsin excessive heat, direct sunlight or dustylocations.

10 Audio

Menu structure

10

258

FM Menu

1. Radio Text

2. Audio Settings1

1. Surround

2. Subwoofer (option)

3. Equalizer Fr

4. Equalizer Rr

5. Reset All

AM Menu

See Audio Settings i the FM Menu.

CD Menu

1. Random

2. Disc Text

3. Audio Settings

See Audio Settings in the FM Menu.

AUX Menu (option)

1. AUX input vol

2. Audio Settings

See Audio Settings in the FM Menu

1 Certain audio systems

10 Audio

Rear Seat Entertainment – Dual Screen (RSE)*

10

��


Introduction

The RSE system can be used at the same timeas the vehicle’s audio system.

When the rear seat passengers play a DVD,connect an external device to the RSE AUXconnectors, etc., and listen to the audiothrough the cordless headphones, the driverand front seat passenger can still use the vehi-cle's audio system to listen to the radio, a CD,music stored on an MP3 player, etc.

Please also refer to the Quick Guide providedwith the RSE system for additional information.

Electrical current - ignition key

The RSE system can be activated with the igni-tion in position I or II (see page 137 for infor-mation on the ignition positions), or when theengine is running. While the engine is beingstarted, a film or music that is currently beingplayed will pause momentarily and resumeplaying when the engine has started.

When the RSE system has been used oncewhen the ignition is switched off, it will be thenbe blocked for further use. RSE can be restar-ted by turning the ignition key to position I.

NOTE

Using RSE for more than approximately10 minutes with the engine switched off maydrain the vehicle’s battery and make it diffi-cult or impossible to start the engine.

If this occurs, a message will be displayedon the RSE system’s screens.

Music

Listening to a music CD

1. Insert a CD into the RSE player’s slot withthe disc’s label facing upward.> The CD will begin to play automatically.

2. Switch on the cordless headphones andselect CH A for the left screen or CH B forthe right screen.> This will direct the sound to the head-

phones.

3. Adjust the headphone volume by using thethumb wheel on the headphones.

To listen through the vehicle’s audio sys-tem speakers, press MODE on the audiosystem control panel and select AUX.Press on the RSE remote to route thesound through the speakers.

Selecting a folder on the CD

1. Insert the CD in the player.

2. Press .

3. Use the navigation buttons (the arrow keyssurrounding the OK button on the RSEremote control) to highlight a folder and/ora specific track.

4. Press to select a sub-folder.

Playback alternatives

The CD can be played in several different ways.Use the navigation buttons to select one of thealternatives.

With the dialogue box displayed:

1. Press the right navigation button to accessthe menu to the right..

2. Use the navigation keys to select one of thealternatives.

3. Confirm your choice by pressing .

Changing tracks on the CD

� Change tracks on the CD by pressing or . Hold the respective buttons

down for fast forward or reverse.

Pause

1. Pause and restart the CD by pressing.

2. Stop the CD by pressing .

3. Press again to eject the CD.

10 Audio


10


Home-burned CDs

CDs burned on a home computer can beplayed. However, the quality of the sound maybe affected by the type of source file and for-mat used, and by the condition of the disc.

RSE-AUX connectors and 12-voltsocket

The three color-coded (yellow-white-red) RSE-AUX connectors can be used to connect anauxiliary device to the RSE system. Always fol-low the connection instructions provided withthe auxiliary device. Devices connected toRSE-AUX can use the RSE screens, cordlessheadphones, the headphone sockets or thevehicle’s audio system speakers.

Connecting a device to RSE-AUX

G015700

RSE-AUX connectors are located on the rear sideof the tunnel console

1. Connect the video cable from the auxiliarydevice to the yellow connector.

2. Connect the left audio cable to the whiteconnector and the right cable to the redconnector.

3. Connect the power cable to the 12-voltsocket (if the device is designed for 12-voltcurrent).

For the location of the 12-volt sockets, seepage 75.

System

The formats supported by the system are:

Audioformat

CD-DA, DVD Audio Playback,MP3, WMA

Videoformat

DVD video, VCD, SVCD, Divx/MPEG-4, WMA video, Photo cdKodak, Photo CD JPG

Discformat

DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM, DVD-RW,DVD+RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, CD-R,CD-ROM, CD-RW, CD-3, HDCD

Advanced system settings

These settings can only be made when there isno disc in the CD/DVD player.

� Press MEDIA MENU.

GENERAL SETUP ANGLE MARK

CAPTION

AUDIO SETUP COMPRESSION

DVX(R)

REGISTRATION

PREFERENCES TV TYPE

AUDIO

SUBTITLE

DEFAULTS

10 Audio


10


Replacing batteries in the remotecontrol and cordless headphones

The remote control and headphones each runon 2 AAA batteries.

G031359

Remote control

1. Remove the retaining screw and lift off thebattery cover.

2. Remove the old batteries and insert newones as indicated by the symbols in thebattery compartment.

3. Replace the battery cover and tighten theretaining screw.

G030395

Cordless headphones

1. Remove the retaining screw and lift off thebattery cover.

2. Remove the old batteries and insert newones as indicated by the symbols in thebattery compartment.

3. Replace the battery cover and tighten theretaining screw.

NOTE

If the temperature in the passenger com-partment is high (e.g., if the car has beenparked in the sun for a prolonged period) orif the batteries in the remote or headphonesare weak, a message will appear on the RSEscreens.

Concern for the environment

Used batteries should be disposed of properly(e.g., at a recycling facility, etc).

G000000

262

Label information.................................................................................. 264Dimensions .......................................................................................... 266Weights ................................................................................................ 268Fluids..................................................................................................... 270Suspension........................................................................................... 272Engine oil............................................................................................... 273Engine specifications............................................................................ 274Electrical system................................................................................... 275Three-way catalytic converter............................................................... 277Volvo programs..................................................................................... 278

11SPECIF ICATIONS

11 Specifications

Label information

11

264

11 Specifications

Label information

11

265

Model plate: includes e.g., Vehicle Identi-fication Number (VIN), codes for color andupholstery, etc.

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

(FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Min-

istry of Transport (CMVSS) standards

(Canada): Your Volvo is designed to meetall applicable safety standards, as evi-denced by the certification label on thedriver's side B-pillar (the structural mem-ber at the side of the vehicle, at the rear ofthe driver's door opening). For further infor-mation regarding these regulations, pleaseconsult your Volvo retailer.

Loads and Tire Pressures: The appear-ance of the decal will vary, depending onthe market for which the vehicle isintended. Canadian models have the upperdecal, U.S. models have the lower one.

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN): TheVIN plate is located on the top left surfaceof the dashboard. The VIN is also stampedon the right hand door pillar.

Vehicle Emission Control Information:Your Volvo is designed to meet all appli-cable emission standards, as evidenced bythe certification label on the underside ofthe hood. For further information regardingthese regulations, please consult yourVolvo retailer.

11 Specifications

Dimensions

11

266

Position Dimension in. (cm)

A Wheelbase 112.6 in. (285.7 cm)

B Length 188.9 in. (479.8 cm)

C Load length, floor, seatback down 79.4 in. (201.8 cm)

D Load length, cargo area 44 in. (111.8 cm)

E Height 70.2 in. (178.4 cm)

F Load height 34.3 in. (87.2 cm)

G Track, front 64.3 in. (163.4 cm)

H Track, rear 63.9 (162.4 cm)

11 Specifications

Dimensions

11

267

Position Dimension in. (cm)

I Load width, floor 41.8 in. (106.4 cm)

J Width 74.7 in. (189.8 cm)

K Width incl. door mirrors 83.1 in. (211.2 cm)

11 Specifications

Weights

11

268

Category USA Canada

Gross vehicle weightA

5-seat, 6-cyl, AWD (All Wheel Drive)

5-seat, 8-cyl, AWD

7-seat, 6-cyl, FWD (Front Wheel Drive)

7-seat, 6-cyl, AWD

7-seat, 8-cyl, AWD

5900 lbs

5900 lbs

5915 lbs

6080 lbs

6100 lbs

2680 kg

2680 kg

–

2760 kg

2770 kg

Capacity weight

5-seat models

7-seat models

1160 lbs

1210 lbs

525 kg

550 kg

Permissible axle weight, frontA

5-seat, 6-cyl, AWD

5-seat, 8-cyl, AWD

7-seat, 6-cyl, FWD

7-seat, 6-cyl, AWD

7-seat, 8-cyl, AWD

2880 lbs

2930 lbs

2770 lbs

2880 lbs

2930 lbs

1310 kg

1330 kg

–

1310 kg

1330 kg

11 Specifications

Weights

11

269

Category USA Canada

Permissible axle weight, rearA

5-seat, 6-cyl, AWD

5-seat, 8-cyl, AWD

7-seat, 6-cyl, FWD

7-seat, 6-cyl, AWD

7-seat, 8-cyl, AWD

3150 lbs

3150 lbs

3170 lbs

3240 lbs

3240 lbs

1430 kg

1430 kg

–

1470 kg

1470 kg

Curb weight

5-seat, AWD

7-seat, FWD

7-seat, AWD

4505 – 4655 lbs

4530 – 4570 lbs

4675 – 4820 lbs

2065 – 2130 kg

–

2135 – 2160 kg

Max. roof load 220 lbs 100 kg

Trailer weight, w/o brakes 1650 lbs 750 kg

Trailer weights, with brakes See the table on page 153 See the table on page 153

Max. tongue weight See the table on page 153 See the table on page 153

A Permissible axle weight or gross vehicle weight must never be exceeded.

CAUTION

The maximum permissible axle loads and/or the gross vehicle weight must not beexceeded.

WARNING

When adding accessories, equipment, lug-gage and other cargo to your vehicle, thetotal capacity weight must not be exceeded.

11 Specifications

Fluids

11


Specifications and capacities

Category Specification

Fuel tank 21.1 US gals. (80 liters)

Octane rating: unleaded gasoline, minimum octane requirement AKI 87,recommended rating AKI 91 or above (See also page 130)

Transmission oilA

TF-80SC

JWS 3309

7.4 US qts. (7.0 liters)

Miscellaneous

Power steering

Windshield washer reservoir

Brake fluid

Air conditioning system

Miscellaneous




Front – 2.2 lb. (1 kg), Rear* 2.9 lb. (1.3 kg) R 134a (HFC134a)

Coolant

3.2 6-cyl.

V8

Volvo original coolant/antifreeze (Thermostat begins to open at 194 ° F(90 ° C)).



Brake fluid DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F (280 °C), P/N 9437433

Power steering fluid Volvo synthetic power steering fluid (Pentosin CHF 11S) P/N 1161529 orequivalent 1.1 US quarts (1.0 liters)

11 Specifications

Fluids

11

271

Category Specification

Washer fluid reservoir Use washer fluid solvent in cold weather conditions 6.9 US quarts (6.5 lit-ers)

Air conditioning system Refrigerant – R134aB

A The transmission oil does not normally need to be changed during the service life of the vehicle. However, it may be necessary to replace the oil if the vehicle is often driven in areas of sustainedtemperature extremes (hot or cold), when towing a trailer over long distances, for prolonged driving in mountainous areas, or if the vehicle is often driven short distances in temperatures under 40 °F(5 °C).

B See page 90 for volumes

11 Specifications

Suspension

11

272

Rear suspension

Individual rear wheel suspension with longitu-dinal support arms, double link arms and trackrods.

Front suspension

Spring strut suspension with integrated shockabsorbers and control arms linked to the sup-port frame. Power-assisted rack and pinionsteering. Safety type steering column.

11 Specifications

Engine oil

11

273

Oil specifications

Engine oil must meet the minimum ILSACspecification GF-4, API SL, or ACEA A1/B1.

Lower quality oils may not offer the same fueleconomy, engine performance, or engine pro-tection.

Volvo recommends Castrol.

Engine designation Volume between MIN-MAX on dipstick VolumeA

3.2 6-cyl. B6324S 1.27 US qts (1.2 liters) 7.82 US qts (7.4 liters)

V8 AWD B8444S 1.3 US qts (1.2 liters) 7.1 US qts. (6.7 liters)

A Including filter replacement.

11 Specifications

Engine specifications

11

274

Engine designation B6324S B8444S

Output

kW/rps 175/103 232/100

hp/rpm 235/6200 311/6000

Torque

Nm/rps 320/53 440/65

ft. lbs./rpm 235/3200 170/4400

No. of cylinders 6 8

Bore (mm/in.) 3.3/84 3.7/94

Stroke (mm/in.) 3.77/96 3.13/79.5

Cylinder displacement, liters 3.19 (194.7 cu in) 4.41 (268.6 cu. in.)

Compression ratio 10.8:1 10.4:1

Charge air cooler (Intercooler)

Turbocharged engines employ a turbo-com-pressor to force air into the engine inlet mani-fold and a charge air cooler to cool the com-pressed inlet air. The resulting increase in airflow raises pressure in the intake manifold andincreases engine power over that developed bythe normally-aspirated engine. The charge aircooler (which resembles a radiator) is locatedbetween the turbo-compressor and inlet mani-fold.

Fuel system

The engine is equipped with a multiport fuelinjection system.

11 Specifications

Electrical system

11

��


General information

12-volt system with voltage controlled gener-ator. Single wire system in which the chassisand engine block are used as conductors,grounded on the chassis.

Battery

Battery 3.2 6-cyl. V8

Voltage 12 V 12 V

Cold startcapacity(CCA)

520 A 600 A

Battery 3.2 6-cyl. V8

Reservecapacity(RC)

100 min 120 min

Capacity(Ah)

60 70

If you must replace your battery, be sure toreplace it with a battery of the same cold startcapacity and reserve capacity as the original.(See the decal on the battery).

WARNING



Bulbs

Bulb Type Socket

High beam H7 65W –

Low beam H11 55W –

Active Bending Lights - low beam* D1S 35W

Active Bending Lights - high beam* H9

65W

Front fog lights H1 55W

11 Specifications

Electrical system

11


Bulb Type Socket

Front/rear parking lights, front/rear side markerlights license plate light, rear footwell lighting

W5W W2,1x9,5d

Front turn signals H21W BAY9s

Rear fog light P21/4W BAY9s

Brake lights, backup lights P21W BA15s

Rear turn signals PY21W BA15s

Vanity mirror lighting 1.2W SV5.5

Front footwell lighting, cargo area lighting C5W SV8.5

WARNING

Active Bending Lights* - due to the highvoltage used by these headlights, thesebulbs should only be replaced by a trainedand qualified Volvo service technician.

11 Specifications

Three-way catalytic converter

11

277

Three-way catalytic converter -general information

• Keep your engine properly tuned. Certainengine malfunctions, particularly involvingthe electrical, fuel or distributor ignitionsystems, may cause unusually high three-way catalytic converter temperatures. Donot continue to operate your vehicle if youdetect engine misfire, noticeable loss ofpower or other unusual operating condi-tions, such as engine overheating or back-firing. A properly tuned engine will helpavoid malfunctions that could damage thethree-way catalytic converter.

• Do not park your vehicle over combustiblematerials, such as grass or leaves, whichcan come into contact with the hot exhaustsystem and cause such materials to igniteunder certain wind and weather condi-tions.

• Excessive starter cranking (in excess ofone minute), or an intermittently firing orflooded engine can cause three-way cata-lytic converter or exhaust system over-heating.

• Remember that tampering or unauthorizedmodifications to the engine, the ElectronicControl Module, or the vehicle may be ille-gal and can cause three-way catalytic con-verter or exhaust system overheating. Thisincludes:

NOTE

Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles withthree-way catalytic converters.

11 Specifications

Volvo programs

11

278

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance

Your new Volvo comes with a four year ONCALL roadside assistance. Additional informa-tion, features, and benefits are described in aseparate information package in your glovecompartment.

If you require assistance, dial:

In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63-VOLVO)

In Canada 1-800-263-0475

Technician certification

In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo sup-ports certification by the National Institute forAutomotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.). Certi-fied technicians have demonstrated a highdegree of competence in specific areas.Besides passing exams, each technician mustalso have worked in the field for two or moreyears before a certificate is issued. These pro-fessional technicians are best able to analyzevehicle problems and perform the necessarymaintenance procedures to keep your Volvo atpeak operating condition.

11 Specifications

11

279

12 Index

12

280

1, 2, 3 ...

12-volt sockets.......................................... 75

A

A/C (air conditioning)........................... 94, 95

ABS.......................................................... 145

Airbag system............................................ 20

Air cleaner................................................ 207

Air conditioning.......................................... 90

Air distribution...................................... 92, 95

Air quality sensor....................................... 94

Air vents..................................................... 92

Alarm........................................................ 127

All Wheel Drive......................................... 144

All Wheel Drive – towing.......................... 152

Anti-lock brake systemwarning light......................................... 56

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)................. 145

Ashtray..................................................... 110

Audiosystem introduction............................ 238

Audio systemHD digital radio................................... 246Rear seat entertainment..................... 259

AUTO (climate control)......................... 95, 96

Automatic transmission........................... 140

Autostart.......................................... 135, 137

AUX (audio system)................................. 253

Average speed........................................... 71

AWD......................................................... 144

B

Bass......................................................... 241

Battery..................................................... 205maintenance....................................... 214specifications...................................... 275

Battery – replacing................................... 215

Belt check................................................ 206

Black box................................................... 11

Black Box (Vehicle Event Data)............... 202

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)..... 160

Blower (fan)................................................ 96

Booster cushionaccessory............................................. 42integrated.............................................. 47

Brake fluid................................................ 212

Brake system........................................... 145

Bulbs........................................................ 217

Bulbs, replacing....................................... 217

C

Capacities, fluids..................................... 270

Capacity weight....................................... 176

Cargo area cover..................................... 117

Cargo grid................................................ 116

Cargo net................................................. 114

Catalytic converter, three-way................. 277

CD Pause................................................. 255

Center console buttons............................. 60

Central locking system - remote key....... 121

Changing a wheel.................................... 182

Changing coolant.................................... 206

Charge air cooler..................................... 274

Check Engine warning light....................... 57

12 Index

12

281

Child restraint anchors......................... 43, 45

Child restraintsrecalls and registration......................... 46

Child safety................................................ 33

Child safety locks.................................... 126

Climate system.......................................... 90refrigerant............................................. 90

Clock reset button..................................... 54

Coat hanger............................................. 112

Cold weather precautions........................ 158

Compact disc careCD care............................................... 257

Convertible seats....................................... 39

Coolant.................................................... 211changing............................................. 206

Courtesy light........................................... 107

Cup holderrear seat.............................................. 111

Curb weight............................................. 176

Current fuel consumption.......................... 71

D

Defrosterrear window and door mirrors.............. 70rear window and mirrors....................... 96windshield............................................. 95

Detachable trailer hitch............................ 156

Dimensions.............................................. 266

Disabling the passenger's side front air-bag............................................................. 25

Display, instrument panel.......................... 54

Dolby Pro Logic II (DPL II)........................ 241

Door mirrors............................................... 81defroster............................................... 70

Door mirrors, folding.................................. 60

Driving conditions, difficult...................... 139

Driving economically................................ 138

Driving through water.............................. 139

E

Economical driving.................................. 138

Electrically operated moonroof.................. 83

Electrical system...................................... 275

Emission inspection readiness................ 203

Enginespecifications...................................... 274starting................................................ 135

Engine oil................................................. 208specifications...................................... 273

F

Federal Clean Air Act............................... 202

Flat tireschanging............................................. 180repairing with tire sealing system....... 184

Fog light..................................................... 56

Fog lightsfront*..................................................... 64

Folding door mirrors.................................. 60

Front airbags.................................. 21, 22, 25

Front seatfolding backrest.................................. 100manually adjusted............................... 100

Front seatspower.................................................. 100ventilated.............................................. 93XC90 Executive.................................. 102

12 Index

12

282

Front suspension..................................... 272

Fuel.......................................................... 130

Fuel filler cap........................................... 133

Fuel filler dooropening manually............................... 133unlocking.............................................. 64

Fuel system.............................................. 274

Fuses....................................................... 224

G

Gasoline................................................... 130

Geartronic – manual shifting.................... 141

Generator................................................. 275

Generator warning light............................. 56

Glove compartment................................. 111

Grocery bag holder.................................. 117

Gross vehicle weight (GVW).................... 176

H

Hand brake................................................ 76

Hazard warning flashers............................ 70

HD digital radio........................................ 246

Headlights.................................................. 63Active Bending Lights............. 60, 64, 217Dual Xenon........................................... 60

Headlights, high and low beams............... 66

Heated front seats..................................... 95

High/low beams – replacing.................... 217

High beam bulb, replacing...................... 222

High beam flash......................................... 66

High beam indicator.................................. 54

Hoisting the vehicle................................. 205

Home safe lighting..................................... 66

Hood, opening/closing.............................. 77

I

Ignition switch.......................................... 137

Immobilizer (start inhibitor)...................... 120

Important information................................ 10

Indicator and warning symbols.................. 54

indicator light............................................. 56

Infant seats................................................ 37

Inflatable Curtain........................................ 29

Inflation pressure, checking..................... 169

Inflation pressure tableCanadian models................................ 172

Information display.................................... 54

Inspection readiness................................ 203

Instrument overview.................................. 52

Instrument panel........................................ 54

Instrument panel lighting........................... 64

Interior lighting......................................... 107

ISOFIX/LATCH anchors............................. 43

J

Jack......................................................... 180

K

Key (ignition switch) positions................. 137

Keys......................................................... 120

12 Index

12

283

L

Label information..................................... 264

Lighting panel............................................ 63

Load carriers............................................ 157

Locking steering wheel............................ 137

Locking the car........................................ 124

Locks, child safety................................... 126

Long distance trips.................................. 158

Low beam headlight.................................. 66

M

Maintenance............................................ 202

Maintenance, periodic............................. 203

Malfunction indicator light......................... 57

Mirrorsdoor, folding......................................... 60power door........................................... 81rearview, auto-dim function.................. 80

Moonroof................................................... 83

MP3 player, connecting........................... 253

Multifilter with air quality sensor................ 94

O

OBD II...................................................... 203

Occupant safety........................................ 16

Oil quality................................................. 208

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)...... 203

On Call Roadside Assistance.................. 278

Owner maintenance................................. 203

P

Paint - color code.................................... 198

Panel lighting, instrument.......................... 64

Park assist....................................... 149, 150

Parking brake............................................. 76warning symbol.................................... 56

Parking lights............................................. 63

Passenger’s side front airbag, disabling. . . 25

Periodic owner-performed maintenance. 203

Permissible axle weight........................... 176

Polishing.................................................. 195

Power moonroof........................................ 83

Power seat............................................... 100

Power steering fluid................................. 212

R

Radiator................................................... 207

Radio functions........................................ 241HD digital radio................................... 246

Rain sensor - windshield wipers................ 68

Rear seat entertainment.......................... 259

Rear suspension...................................... 272

Rearview mirror with compass.................. 80

Rear window defroster.............................. 70

Recalls, child restraints.............................. 46

Recirculation.............................................. 95

REDUCE SPEED........................................ 58

Refrigerant (A/C system)............................ 90

Refrigerator (XC90 Executive).................. 113

Registering child restraints........................ 46

Remote key.............................................. 121replacing the battery........................... 123

Reporting safety defectsCanada................................................. 17USA....................................................... 16

12 Index

12

284

S

Safety defects, reportingCanada................................................. 17USA....................................................... 16

Safety locks, child.................................... 126

Seat belt..................................................... 18

Seats........................................................ 100

Service..................................................... 202

Shiftlock................................................... 135

Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags....... 28

Snow chains............................................ 178

Snow tires................................................ 178

Spare tire................................................. 179

Spare tire – accessing............................. 181

Spare wheel, lowering............................. 181

Speedometer............................................. 54

Starting the car........................................ 135

Start inhibitor (immobilizer)...................... 120

Steering wheel lock................................. 137

Stone chips, touching up......................... 198

Storage compartments............ 109, 111, 112

Studded tires........................................... 178

Sun visor.................................................... 84

T

Tachometer................................................ 54

Tailgatelocking/unlocking................................ 124opening................................................. 77

Tailgate wipers......................................... 213

Technician certification............................ 278

Temperature control.................................. 96

Temperature gauge................................... 54

Temporary spare tire............................... 179

Three-way catalytic converter................. 277

TIME FOR REGULAR SERVICE................. 58

Tire inflation pressure tableCanadian models................................ 172US models.......................................... 171

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 189

Tires......................................................... 166age...................................................... 166changing............................................. 180changing from summer to winter........ 167designations....................................... 173

improving economy............................ 166inflation............................................... 169inflation pressure, checking................ 169inflation pressure tables..................... 171rotation............................................... 167spare................................................... 179storing................................................. 167tire sealing system.............................. 184tread wear indicator............................ 168

Tire sealing system.................................. 184

Towing a trailer........................................ 153V8-engine........................................... 155

Towing - cars with All Wheel Drive.......... 152

Towing the vehicle................................... 151

Trailer hitch - detachable......................... 156

Trailer towing................................... 153, 155

Transmission, automatic.......................... 140

Tread wear indicator................................ 168

Treble....................................................... 241

Trip computer............................................ 71

Trip odometer............................................ 54

Turn signals............................................... 66

12 Index

12

285

U

Uniform Tire Quality Grading................... 177

Unlocking fuel filler door............................ 64

Unlocking the car..................................... 124

Unpaved roads, driving on...................... 139

V

V8 engine and trailer towing.................... 155

Vanity mirror............................................ 108

Vehicle dimensions.................................. 266

Vehicle Event Data............................. 11, 202

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)......... 265

Vehicle loading........................................ 176

Vehicle weights........................................ 268

Ventilated seats......................................... 93

Volvo Inflatable Curtain.............................. 29

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance........ 278

W

Warning symbol......................................... 54

Warning symbol in center of dashboard.... 54

Warranties................................................ 202

Washer fluid reservoir...................... 207, 211

Washing the vehicle................................. 194

Water, driving through............................. 139

Waxing..................................................... 195

Weights.................................................... 268

Wheels..................................................... 166storing................................................. 167

WindshieldIR coating............................................. 69

Windshield washer fluid reservoir............ 211

Windshield wipers.................................... 213

Winter/Wet driving mode......................... 158

Wipers...................................................... 213

W – Winter............................................... 141

12 Index

12

286

�� !��"��#��$�%&��

Date post:	03-Feb-2022
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	5 times
Download:	0 times

VOLVO XC90 Owner's Manual

Documents